2006 RFP For Epc (Final) 17-03-2006

NIGER DELTA POWER HOLDING COMPANY OF
NIGERIA
PLC.
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
FOR
Engineering, Procurement and Construction

(EPC)
OF
DISTRIBUTION LINES AND SUBSTATIONS
ISSUED ------ March, 2006

NIGER DELTA POWER HOLDING COMPANY OF NIGERIA PLC.
DISTRIBUTION LINES AND SUBSTATIONS PROJECTS
Request for Proposal for EPC Contractors
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I STANDARD LETTER OF INVITATION (LOI)
SECTION II GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
SECTION III SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
SECTION IV LETTER OF INVITATION (LOI)
SECTION V TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR)
SECTION VI STANDARD FORM OF CONTRACT
SECTION VII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
SECTION VIII BID SUBMITTALS
SECTION IX TECHNICAL PROPOSAL(SCHEDULES)
SECTION X FINANCIAL PROPOSAL(SCHEDULE OF PRICES)
2
SECTION I STANDARD LETTER OF INVITATION (LOI)

(Price shall be a selection factor)
Abuja, 17th March 2006
Dear [Name of EPC Contractors]
Re: Proposal for Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Works, Letter of
Invitation (LOI)
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 You are hereby invited to submit bid for the EPC works named in the attached LOI Data
Sheet (referred to as “Data Sheet”). Your bid could form the basis for future negotiations
and ultimately a contract between your firm and the Employer named in the Data Sheet.
1.1.2 A brief description of the EPC Works and its objectives are given in the Data Sheet.
1.1.3 The Assignment shall be implemented in accordance with the work schedule indicated
in the Data Sheet. When the work schedule includes several phases, continuation of
work for the next phase shall be subject to satisfactory performance of the previous
phase, as determined by the Employer.
1.1.4 The Employer intends to finance this contract through funds from Federal Government
of Nigeria (FGN) for which this LOI is issued.
1.1.5 To obtain first-hand information on the EPC works and on the local conditions, you are
encouraged to pay a visit to the Employer before submitting a proposal and attend a
pre-proposal site visit if specified in the Data Sheet. Your representative shall meet the
officials named in the Data Sheet. Please ensure that these officials are advised of the
visit in adequate time to allow them to make appropriate arrangements. You shall fully
inform yourself of local conditions and take them into account in preparing your
proposal.
1.1.6 The Employer shall provide the inputs specified in the Data Sheet, assist the EPC
Contractor in obtaining licenses and permits needed to carry out the works, and make
available relevant project data and reports.
1.1.7 Please note that (i) the costs of preparing the proposal and of negotiating the contract,
including a visit to the Employer, are not reimbursable as a direct cost of the
Assignment; and (ii) the Employer is not bound to accept any of the proposals
submitted.
1.1.8 An invitation to submit proposals has been sent to the firms stated in the Data Sheet.
1.1.9 VOID
{We wish to remind you that in order to avoid conflicts of interest, any EPC contractor
affiliated or associated with the Employer’s Consultant appointed shall not bid for Lots in
3
the same Distribution Zone where the Consultant is engaged. You should clarify your
situation in that respect with the Employer before preparing the proposal}.
1.2. DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 To prepare a proposal, please use the attached Documents listed in the Data Sheet.
1.2.2 Contractors requiring a clarification of the Documents must notify the Employer, in
writing, not later than seven (7) days before the proposal submission date. Any request
for clarification in writing, or by cable, e-mail or facsimile shall be sent to the Employer’s
address indicated in the Data Sheet. The Employer shall respond by cable, e-mail or
facsimile to such requests, and copies of the response will be sent to all invited
Contractors without identifying the source of inquiry.
1.2.3 At any time before the submission of proposals, the Employer may, for any reason,
whether at its own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by an invited
consulting firm, modify the Documents by amendment. The amendment shall be sent in
writing or by cable, e-mail or facsimile to all invited consulting firms and will be binding
on them. The Employer may at its discretion extend the deadline for the submission of
proposals.
1.3. PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL
1.3.1 You are requested to submit bid(s) comprising technical and financial proposal for one
or multiple Lots. Your bid(s) shall be written in the language specified in the Data Sheet.
1.3.2 Bid Documentation

1.3.2.1 In preparing the bid document, you are expected to examine all terms and instructions
included in the bid documents. Failure to provide all requested information shall be at
your own risk and may result in rejection of your bid.
1.3.2.2 During preparation of the technical proposal, you must give particular attention to the
following:
i) A firm that has not been short-listed cannot associate with a EPC Contractor on
the shortlist to provide the requested services.
ii) Subcontracting part of the Work to domestic sub contractor(s) is considered

desirable; the same sub-contractors may be included in several proposals,
subject to limitations in the Data Sheet. Subcontracting costs may not exceed
25% (percent) of the total proposed contract price.
iii) The duration of various activities (supply and construction) should be shown in
the Bar Chart. Your bid for supply of material and construction including the
construction manpower and site supervisory staff should be based on the Bar
Chart.
iii) The key supervisory staff proposed shall be permanent Employees of the firm,
unless otherwise indicated in the Data Sheet.
iv) Proposed supervisory staff must have experience outside their own country,
preferably under conditions similar to those prevailing in Nigeria.
4
v) No alternative to key supervisory staff may be proposed and only one curriculum
vitae (CV) may be submitted for each position.
vii) Contractor’s progress/ review reports shall be in the Language(s) given in the
Data Sheet. Working knowledge of the national language by the contractor’s
personnel is recommended.
1.3..2.3 Your bid document/ proposal shall provide the following and any additional information,
using the formats attached in Appendix 1:
i) A brief description of the Bidder/ consortium and sub-contractors’ organisations,

their manufacturing/ installed capacities and an outline of recent experience on
projects of a similar nature. For each project of similar nature, the outline should
indicate the details of material/equipment supplied, works executed, profiles of
the staff provided, duration, contract amount and bidder involvement.
ii) Any comments or suggestions on the TOR, and a description of the methodology
(work plan) which the Bidder have proposed to execute the project, illustrated
with bar charts of activities, and the graphics of the Critical Path Method (CPM)
or Program Evaluation Review Technique (PERT) type, if appropriate.
iii) The composition of the proposed supervisory staff, the tasks that would be
assigned to each, and their timing.
iv) CVs recently signed by the proposed key site supervisory staff or an authorised
manager in the home office. Key information shall include number of years with
the bidder, and degree of responsibility held in various projects of similar nature
during the last ten (10) years.
v) Estimates of the total time effort (person x months) to be provided to carry out
the construction activities, supported by bar chart diagrams showing the time
proposed (person x months) for each supervisory staff member.
vi) Details for the home office staff earmarked for the back-up support.
vii) The Bidder’s comments, if any, on the data, services and facilities to be provided
by the Employer and indicated in the TOR.
viii) If the Data Sheet specifies training as a major component of the Assignment, the
proposal should include a detailed description of the proposed methodology,
staffing, budget and monitoring.
viii) The bidder shall fill in the price schedule for all the items of supply of material
and construction activities. Any item against which no price indicated will be
considered to be supplied or performed free of cost to the Employer. The cost of
supervisory staff and Project Manager Office and its associated staff will be
deemed to be included in the quoted prices and no separate payment will be
made. Adequate number of vehicles, office equipment, furniture and supplies for
printing of documents, etc. shall be provided. These costs should be broken into
foreign and local costs. Your financial proposal should be prepared using the
formats attached in Appendix 2.
1.3.2.4 The bid/quoted prices shall take into account the tax liability and cost of insurance
specified in the Data Sheet.
5
1.4. SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL
1.4.1 You shall submit one original bid proposal including price schedule and the number of
copies of each indicated in the Data Sheet and one (1) electronic copy. Bid proposal for
each Lot shall be in a separate envelope indicating original or copy, as appropriate,
indicating the Lot No. and Name of the Lot. The envelope shall be clearly marked:
“DO NOT OPEN, EXCEPT IN PRESENCE OF THE EVALUATION COMMITTEE.”
1.4.2 In the event of any discrepancy between the copies of the proposals, the original shall
govern. The original and each copy of the bid shall be prepared in indelible ink and shall
be signed by the Bidder’s authorised representative. The representative’s authorisation
shall be confirmed by a written power of attorney accompanying the proposals. All
pages of the bid document shall be initialled by the person or persons signing the
proposal.
1.4.3 The proposal shall contain no inter-lineation or overwriting except as necessary to

correct errors made by the Bidder themselves. Any such corrections shall be initialled by
the person or persons signing the proposal.
1.4.4 The completed bid documents shall be delivered on or before the time and date stated
in the Data Sheet.
1.4.5 The proposal shall be valid for the number of days stated in the Data Sheet from the
date of its submission. During this period, you shall keep available the supervisory staff
proposed for the project work. The Employer shall make its best effort to complete
negotiations at the location stated in the Data Sheet within this period.
1.5. WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL
Bids may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic notice received at any time prior to
award. Bids may be withdrawn in person by a proposer or his authorized representative,
provided his identity is made known and he signs a receipt for the withdrawal of the offer
prior to award.
1.6 MODIFICATION OF BID
Except as otherwise decided by the Employer, modifications to bids must be received

not later than the closing date and time specified for receipt of bids made in response to
the letter of invitation (request for proposal). Modifications must be made by written or
telegraphic notice, which clearly identifies the bids being modified, the nature of the
modification, the reference of the letter of invitation as well as the closing date and time
for receipt of bids. Modifications must be delivered in writing to the office designated for
receipt of bids with the reason(s) for the modifications.
1.7 BID EVALUATION
The bids shall be evaluated both for supply of Distribution line material and substation
equipment and construction of line and substation together covered under the Lot.
1.8 NEGOTIATIONS
6
1.8.1 Prior to the expiration of proposal validity, the Employer shall notify the successful
Bidder that submitted the lowest techno-economical bid by registered letter, cable, e-
mail or facsimile and invite it to negotiate the Contract.
1.8.2 Negotiations normally take from two to five days. The aim is to reach agreement on all
points and initial a draft contract by the conclusion of negotiations.
1.8.3 Negotiations shall commence with a discussion of your proposal for supply of line
material and substation equipment and construction of lines and substations as per time
schedule given in the Bar Chart including the adequacy and experience of supervisory
staff and construction methodology and construction inputs and any suggestions you
may have made to improve the TOR. Agreement shall then be reached on the final
TOR, the supervisory staffing, and the bar charts, which shall indicate activities, staff,
periods in the field and in the home office, staff months, logistics and reporting. Special
attention shall be paid to optimizing the required outputs from the Bidders within the
available budget and to defining clearly the inputs required from the Employer to ensure
satisfactory implementation of the Project.
1.8.4 Changes agreed upon shall then be reflected in the bid document.
1.8.5 Negotiations shall be concluded with a review of the draft form of Contract. The
Employer and the Bidder shall finalize the contract to conclude negotiations. If
negotiations fail, the Employer shall invite the next techno-economically evaluated
second lowest bidder to contract negotiations.
1.9 AWARD OF CONTRACT
1.9.1 The contract shall be awarded after successful negotiations with the successful
Bidders. Upon successful completion of the negotiations, the Employer shall promptly
inform the other bidders that their bids have not been selected.
1.9.2 The selected bidder is expected to commence the work on the date and at the location
specified in the Data Sheet.
1.10 CONFIRMATION OF RECEIPT
Please inform the Employer by e-mail/facsimile:
i) that you received the letter of invitation,

ii) whether you will submit bid(s) and
iii) if you plan to submit bid(s), when and how you will transmit it.
1.11 CORRUPT OR FRAUDULENT PRACTICES
The Employer requires that the Bidders/Suppliers/Contractors observe the highest

standard of ethics during the procurement and executions of this contract. In pursuance
of this policy, the Employer
a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:
i) "corrupt practice" means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting of any thing of
value to influence the action of a public official in the procurement process or in
contract execution:
7
ii) "fraudulent practice" means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a

procurement process or the execution of a contract to the detriment of the
Employer, and includes collusive practice among Bidders (prior to or after bid
submission) designed to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels
and to deprive the Employer of the benefits of free and open competition;
b) will reject a proposal for award if its on the basis of incomplete, inaccurate or misleading
information , or it is established, by a decision of a court of law, or following a special
audit, that the contract was awarded on the basis of corrupt practices.
8
SECTION II GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
2.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

2.1.1 Definitions
Unless the context otherwise requires, the following terms whenever used in this Contract have
the following meanings:
a) “Applicable Law” means the laws and any other instruments having the force of law in
the Government’s country (or in such other country as may be specified in the Special
Conditions of Contract (SC)), as they may be issued and in force from time to time;
c) “Contract” means the Contract signed by the Parties, to which these General Conditions
of Contract (GC) are attached, together with all the documents listed in Clause 1 of such
signed Contract;
d) “Contract Price” means the price to be paid for the performance of the Services, in
accordance with Clause 6;
e) “foreign currency” means any currency other than the currency of the Government;
f) “GC” means these General Conditions of Contract;
g) “Government” means the Government of the Client’s country;
h) “local currency” means the currency of the Government
i) "Member", in case the Contractor consists of a joint venture/ consortium of more than
one entity, means any of these entities; "Members" means any of these entities, and
"Member in charge" means the entity specified in the SC to act on their behalf in
exercising all the Contractor’s rights and obligations towards the Employer under this
Contract;
j) "Party" means the Employer or EPC Contractor, as the case may be, and "Parties"
means both of them
2.1.2 Law Governing the Contract
This Contract, its meaning and interpretation, and the relation between the Parties shall
be governed by the Applicable Law.
2.1.3 Language
This Contract has been executed in the language specified in the SC, which shall be the
binding and controlling language for all matters relating to the meaning or interpretation
of this Contract.
2.1.4 Notices
Any notice, request, or consent made pursuant to this Contract shall be in writing and
shall be deemed to have been made, when delivered in person to an authorized
9
representative of the Party to whom the communication is addressed, or when sent by
registered mail, e-mail, telegram, or facsimile to such Party at the address specified in
the SC.
2.1.5 Location
The Services shall be performed at such locations as are specified in Appendix A and,
where the location of a particular task is not so specified, at such locations, whether in
the Government's country or elsewhere, as the Employer may approve.
2.1.6 Authorized
Any action required or permitted to be taken, and any document required or permitted to
be executed, under this Contract by the Employer or the Contractor may be taken or
executed by officials specified in the SC
2.1.7 Taxes and Duties
Unless otherwise specified in the SC, the Contractor/ consortium, Sub-contractors, and
their Personnel shall pay such taxes, duties, fees, and other impositions as may be
levied under the Applicable Law, the amount of which is deemed to have been included
in the Contract Price
2.2 COMMENCEMENT, COMPLETION, MODIFICATION,

AND TERMINATION OF CONTRACT
2.2.1 Effectiveness of Contract
This Contract shall come into effect on the date the Contract is signed by both parties or
such other later date as may be stated in the SC.
2.2.2 Commencement of Services
The EPC Contractors shall begin carrying out the Services seven (7) days after the date
the Contract becomes effective, or at such other date as may be specified in the SC.
2.2.3 Expiration of Contract
Unless terminated earlier pursuant to Clause 2.6, this Contract shall terminate at the
end of such time period after the Effective Date as is specified in the SC.
2.2.4 Modification
Modification of the terms and conditions of this Contract, including any modification of
the scope of the Services or of the Contract Price, may only be made by written
agreement between the Parties.
2.2.5 Force Majeure
2.2.5.1 Definition
For the purposes of this Contract, “Force Majeure” means an event which is beyond the
reasonable control of a Party and which makes a Party’s performance of its obligations
10
under the Contract impossible or so impractical as to be considered impossible under
the circumstances.
2.2.5.2 No Breach of Contract
The failure of a Party to fulfil any of its obligations under the contract shall not be
considered to be a breach of, or default under, this Contract insofar as such inability
arises from an event of Force Majeure, provided that the Party affected by such an
event (a) has taken all reasonable precautions, due care and reasonable alternative
measures in order to carry out the terms and conditions of this Contract, and (b) has
informed the other Party as soon as possible about the occurrence of such an event.
2.2.5.3 Extension of Time
Any period within which a Party shall, pursuant to this Contract, complete any action or
task, shall be extended for a period equal to the time during which such Party was
unable to perform such action as a result of Force Majeure.
2.2.5.4 Payments
During the period of their inability to perform the Services as a result of an event of
Force Majeure, the Contractor shall be entitled to continue to be paid under the terms of
this Contract, as well as to be reimbursed for additional costs reasonably and
necessarily incurred by them during such period for the purposes of the works and in
reactivating the works after the end of such period.
2.2.6 Termination
2.2.6.1 By the Client
The Employer may terminate this Contract, by not less than thirty (30) days’ written
notice of termination to the Contractor, to be given after the occurrence of any of the
events specified in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this Clause 2.6.1 and sixty (60) days’ in
the case of the event referred to in (d):
(a) if the Contractor do not remedy a failure in the performance of their obligations
under the Contract, within thirty (30) days after being notified or within any
further period as the Employer may have subsequently approved in writing;
(b) if the Contractor / Consortium become insolvent or bankrupt;
c) if, as the result of Force Majeure, the Contractor/ consortium is unable to perform
a material portion of the works for a period of not less than sixty (60) days; or
(d) if the Employer, in its sole discretion, decides to terminate this Contract.
2.2.6.2 By the Contractor
The Contractor may terminate this Contract, by not less than thirty (30) days’ written
notice to the Employer, such notice to be given after the occurrence of any of the events
specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this Clause 2.6.2:
11
(a) if the Employer fails to pay any monies due to the Contractor pursuant to this
Contract and not subject to dispute pursuant to Clause 7 within forty-five (45)
days after receiving written notice from the Contractor that such payment is
overdue; or
(b) if, as the result of Force Majeure, the Contractor is unable to perform a material
portion of the works for a period of not less than sixty (60) days.
2.2.6.3 Payment upon Termination
Upon termination of this Contract pursuant to Clauses 2.6.1 or 2.6.2, the Employer shall
make the following payments to the Contractor:
(a) payment pursuant to Clause 6 for work satisfactorily performed prior to the
effective date of termination;
(b) except in the case of termination pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause
2.6.1, reimbursement of any reasonable cost incident to the prompt and orderly
termination of the Contract, including the cost of the return travel of the
Personnel and their eligible dependents.
2.3. OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR

2.3.1 General
The Contractor shall perform the works and carry out their obligations with all due
diligence, efficiency, and economy, in accordance with generally accepted professional
techniques and practices, and shall observe sound management practices, and employ
appropriate advanced technology and safe methods. The Contractor shall always act, in
respect of any matter relating to this Contract or to the Services, as faithful advisers to
the Employer, and shall at all times support and safeguard the Employer’s legitimate
interests in any dealings with Sub-contractors or third parties.
2.3.2 Conflict of Interests
2.3.2.1 Contractor Not to Benefit from Commissions Discounts, etc.
The payment of the Contractor pursuant to Clause 6 shall constitute the Contractors’
sole payment in connection with this Contract or the Services, and the Contractor shall
not accept for their own benefit any trade commission, discount, or similar payment in
connection with activities pursuant to this Contract or to the Services or in the discharge
of their obligations under the Contract, and the Contractor shall use their best efforts to
ensure that the Personnel, any Sub-contractors, and agents of either of them similarly
shall not receive any such additional payments.
2.3.2.2 Contractor and Affiliates Not to Be Otherwise Interested in Employer’s

Consultant’s Service
The Contractor agrees that, during the term of this Contract and after its termination, the
Contractor and their affiliates, as well as any Sub-contractor and any of its affiliates,
shall be disqualified from providing goods, works, or services (other than the Services
12
and any continuation thereof) for any project resulting from or closely related to the
Employer’s consultant’s Services.
2.3.2.3 Prohibition of Conflicting Activities
Neither the Contractor nor their Sub-contractor nor the Personnel shall engage, either
directly or indirectly, in any of the following activities:
a) during the term of this contract, any business or professional activities

assigned to them under this Contract; or
b) after the termination of this contract, such other activities as may be specified
in the SC.
2.3.3 Confidentiality
The Contractor, their Sub-contractors, and the Personnel of either of them shall not
reveal document on the project to outside party either during the term or within two (2)
years after the expiration of this Contract, or the Employer's business or operations
without the prior written consent of the Employer.
2.3.4 Insurance to Be Taken Out by the Contractor
The Contractor (a) shall take out and maintain, and shall cause any Sub-contractor to
take out and maintain, at their (or the Sub-contractors’, as the case may be) own cost
but on terms and conditions approved by the Employer, insurance against the risks, and
for the coverage, as shall be specified in the SC; and (b) at the Employer’s request,
shall provide evidence to the Employer showing that such insurance has been taken out
and maintained and that the current premiums have been paid.
2.3.5 Contractor Actions Requiring Employer’s Prior Approval
The Contractor shall obtain the Employer's prior approval in writing before taking any of
the following actions:
a) entering into a subcontract for the performance of any part of the works,
b) appointing such sub-contractors/ sub suppliers not listed by name in Appendix C

("Sub-contractors or sub suppliers"), and
c) any other action that may be specified in the SC.
2.3.6 Reporting Obligations
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer the reports and documents specified in
Appendix B in the form, in the numbers, and within the periods set forth in the said
Appendix.
2.3.7 Documents Prepared by the Contractor to Be the Property of the Employer
All plans, drawings, specifications, designs, reports, and other documents and software
submitted by the Contractor or his sub contractor in accordance with Clause 3.6 shall
become and remain the property of the Employer, and the Contractor shall, not later
than upon termination or expiration of this Contract, deliver all such documents and
13
software to the Employer, together with a detailed inventory thereof. The Contractor may
retain a copy of such documents and software. Restrictions about the future use of
these documents, if any, shall be specified in the SC.
2.4 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL

2.4.1 Description of Personnel
The titles, agreed job descriptions, minimum qualifications, and estimated periods of
engagement in the carrying out of the site work as Key Personnel are described in
Appendix C. The Key Personnel and Sub-contractors listed by title as well as by name
in Appendix C are hereby approved by the Employer.
2.4.2 Removal and/or Replacement of Personnel
(a) Except as the Employer may otherwise agree, no changes shall be made in the
Key Personnel. If, for any reason beyond the reasonable control of the
Contractor, it becomes necessary to replace any of the Key Personnel, the
Contractor shall provide as a replacement a person of equivalent or better
qualifications.
(b) If the Client finds that any of the Personnel have (i) committed serious
misconduct or have been charged with having committed a criminal action, or (ii)
have reasonable cause to be dissatisfied with the performance of any of the
Personnel, then the Contractor, at the Client’s written request specifying the
grounds therefore, provide as a replacement, a person with qualifications and
experience acceptable to the Client.
(c) The Consultants shall have no claim for additional costs arising out of or
incidental to any removal and/or replacement of Personnel
2.5 OBLIGATIONS OF THE EMPLOYER

2.5.1 Assistance and Exemptions
The Employer shall use its best efforts to ensure that the Government shall provide the
Contractor such assistance and exemptions as specified in the SC.
2.5.2 Change in the Applicable Law
If, after the date of this Contract, there is any change in the Applicable Law with respect
to taxes and duties which increases or decreases the cost of the works carried out by
the Contractor/consortium/ subcontractors / sub-suppliers, then the payment and
reimbursable expenses otherwise payable to the Contractor under this Contract shall be
increased or decreased accordingly by agreement between the Parties, and
corresponding adjustments shall be made to the amounts referred to in Clauses 6.2 (a)
or (b), as the case may be.
2.5.3 Services and Facilities
14
The Employer shall make available to the Contractor the Services and Facilities listed
under Appendix F.
2.6 PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR

2.6.1 STAGE PAYMENTS
The Contractor’s total stage payments shall not exceed the Contract Price and shall be
inclusive of material/ equipment prices, construction prices, Sub-contractor’s supplied
material / equipment prices, printing, communications, travel, accommodation, and the
like, and all other costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out the works described in
Appendix A. Except as provided in Clause 5.2, the Contract Price may only be
increased above the amounts stated in Clause 6.2 if the Parties have agreed to
additional payments in accordance with Clause 2.4.
2.6.2 Contract Price
(a) The price payable in foreign currency is set forth in the SC.
(b) The price payable in local currency is set forth in the SC.
2.6.3 Payment for Additional Works and Services
For the purpose of determining the payments due for additional works and services as
may be agreed under Clause 2.4 a breakdown of the supply and construction activities
is provided in Appendices D and E.
2.6.4 Terms and Conditions of Payment
Payments will be made to the account of the Contractor and according to the payment
schedule stated in the SC. The first payment shall be made against the provision by the
Contractor of a bank guarantee for the same amount, and shall be valid for the period
stated in the SC. Any other payment shall be made after the conditions listed in the SC
for such payment have been met, and the Contractor have submitted an invoice to the
Employer specifying the amount due.
2.7 SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES

2.7.1 Amicable Settlement
The Parties shall use their best efforts to settle amicably all disputes arising out of or in
connection with this Contract or its interpretation.
2.7.2 Dispute Settlement
Any dispute between the Parties as to matters arising pursuant to this Contract that
cannot be settled amicably within thirty (30) days after receipt by one Party of the other
Party’s request for such amicable settlement may be submitted by either Party for
settlement in accordance with the provisions specified in the SC.
15
SECTION III SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Number of Amendments of, and Supplements to, Clauses in

the General Conditions GC of Contract.
3.1.1(a) The words “in the Government’s country” are amended to read in Nigeria.
3.1.1(i) The Member in Charge is _______________.] (only for joint venture)
3.1.2 The language is: English.
3.1.3 The addresses are:
For the Client:

Niger Delta PHCN PLC.
C/o The Honourable Minister of Power and Steel
4th Floor, Annex II,
Federal Secretariat Complex
Shehu Shagari Way
Central Area
Abuja-FCT
Nigeria.
Attention:
Tel:
Facsimile:
For the Contractor: ____________________

____________________
____________________
Attention: ____________________
E-mail: ____________________
Facsimile: ____________________
3.1.4 The Authorized Representatives are:
For the Client:
For the Contractor: ____________________
16
3.1.5 The Invited Contracting Firms are listed in section 4.6.
3.1.6 The Contractor, Sub-contractors and their Personnel shall pay such taxes,
duties, fees, levies, and other impositions as may be levied, under the Applicable
Law, the amount of which is deemed to have been included in the Contract
Price.
3.1.7 The date on which this Contract shall come into effect is: ………………..]
3.1.8 The date for the commencement of contract is ……………………………]
3.1.9 The period shall end on ………………….. (excluding arrangement for defect liability
period)
3.2.1 “Procurement Rules of Funding Agencies
Furthermore, if the Contractor, as part of the Works and Services, have the
responsibility of advising the Client on the procurement of goods, works, or services, the
Contractor shall comply with any applicable procurement guidelines of the Federal
Government of Nigeria or any funding agencies and shall at all times exercise such
responsibility in the best interest of the Employer. Any discounts or commissions
obtained by the Contractor in the exercise of such procurement responsibility shall be
for the account of the Employer.”]
3.2.2 The risks and coverage shall be:
(i) Third Party motor vehicle - Yes
(ii) Third Party liability - Yes
(iii) Employer’s liability and workers’ compensation - Yes
(iv) Professional liability - Yes
(v) Loss or damage to equipment and property - Yes
3.2.3(c) The other actions are – Not Applicable
3.2.4 “The Contractor shall not use these documents for purposes unrelated to this
Contract without the prior written approval of the Employer.”
3.3 Employer’s Obligation
(a) Niger Delta PHCN shall furnish all necessary data, documentation and information
available and shall give to the Contractor all such assistance as the Contractor shall
reasonably request for the performance of its obligations under this Contract.
(b) Niger Delta PHCN will use its best efforts to assist the Contractor to:
(i) arrange for the Personnel and , if appropriate, their eligible dependants (i.e.
wife and one child under 18 years of age) to be provided promptly with all
17
necessary entry and exit visas, residence permits, exchange permits and
other documents required for their stay in Nigeria
(ii) facilitate prompt clearance through customs of any property required for their
Services and of the Personnel and their eligible dependants;
(iii) exempt the Contractor and the Personnel and any Subcontractors employed
by the Contractor for the Services from any requirement to register or to
obtain any permit to practice the profession of the Contractor or to establish
themselves either individually or as a corporate entity according to the Law of
Nigeria and
(iv) grant to the Contractor and any Subcontractors either privilege, pursuant to
the Law of Nigeria of bringing into Nigeria reasonable amounts of foreign
currency for the purposes of the services or for the personal use of the
Personnel and their dependants and of withdrawing any such amounts as
may be earned therein by the Personnel in the execution of the Services.
3.3.1 (a) The amount in foreign currency or currencies is Offshore US$ quotation
(Naira equivalent)
3.3.1(b) The amount in local currency is Onshore quotation in Nigerian Naira
The accounts are:
for foreign currency:_________________
for local currency:_________________
3.3.2 Payments shall be made according to the following schedule:

a. Supply of Off-shore Materials/Equipment from Contractor’s own
suppliers
i) Twenty-Five percent (25%) of the off-shore portion of Contract Price shall be
paid, as down payment in advance, by the Employer through telegraphic
transfer to the contractor, on presentation of invoice, Advance Payment and
Performance Guarantee Bonds from a reputable Bank acceptable to the
Employer. The Advance Payment Bond shall remain valid up to the issuance
of the Provisional Takeover Certificate.
ii) Letter of Credit shall be opened for Seventy-Five (75%) balance of the off-
shore portion of Contract Price.
iii) Fifty-five Percent (55%) of the off-shore portion of the Contract Price
shall be paid to the Contractor on presentation of shipping documents.
iv) Ten Percent (10%) of the off-shore portion of the Contract Price shall be
paid after the delivery of the equipment and materials to the project site.
v) Five Percent (5%) of the off-shore portion of the Contract price shall be
paid on the issuance of the Provisional Taking-over Certificate .
vi) The final Five per cent (5%) of the off-shore portion of Contract Price
shall be paid after the expiration of the 12 months warranty period and
issuance of Final Taking-over certificate.
18
b) Local currency (On-shore)
(i) Twenty-five percent (25%) advance payment on presentation of the Contractor’s
invoice and a Bank Bond in the same amount valid up to the completion of the
works. The Bank Bond shall be from a Nigerian Bank acceptable to the Employer.
(ii) Sixty-five percent (65%) progress payment against milestones determined with the
Engineer.
(iii) Five percent (5%) on commissioning and issuance of the interim taking-over
certificate.
(iv) The final Five percent (5%) shall be paid after the expiration of the 12 months
warranty period and issuance of Final Taking-over certificate.
3.3.3 Payment shall be made within _60__ days of receipt of the invoice and the relevant
documents specified in Clause 6.4, and within _90_ days in the case of the final
payment.
The interest rate is Not Applicable
3.3.4 Any dispute, controversy, or claim arising out of or relating to this contract, or the
breach, termination, or invalidity thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accordance
with the UNCITRAL Arbitration Rules as at present in force
19
Appendices
APPENDIX A
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS
Give detailed descriptions of the material supplies and construction works to be rendered, dates
for completion of various supplies and construction works, place of performance for different
tasks, specific tasks to be approved by Employer, etc.
APPENDIX B
REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
List format, frequency, and contents of reports; persons to receive them; dates of submission;
etc. If no reports are to be submitted, state here “Not applicable”.
APPENDIX C
KEY SITE PERSONNEL AND SUBCONTRACTORS
List under:
C-1 Titles [and names, if already available], detailed job descriptions and minimum
qualifications of foreign Personnel to be assigned to work in the Government’s
country, and staff-months for each.
C-2 Same as C-1 for Key foreign Personnel to be assigned to work outside the
Government’s country.
C-3 List of proposed Sub-contractors and/or Suppliers for the Employer’s approval;
same information with respect to their Personnel as in C-1 or C-2.
C-4 Same information as C-1 for Key local Personnel.
20
APPENDIX D
BREAKDOWN OF CONTRACT PRICE IN FOREIGN CURRENCY
List here the elements of cost used to arrive at the breakdown of the lump sum price,
foreign currency portion:
APPENDIX E
BREAKDOWN OF CONTRACT PRICE IN LOCAL CURRENCY
List here the elements of cost used to arrive at the breakdown of the lump sum price,
local currency portion:
APPENDIX F
SERVICES AND FACILITIES PROVIDED BY THE EMPLOYER
21
SECTION IV Letter of Invitation (LOI)

(Where Price will be a selection Factor)
LOI DATA SHEET
LOI Clause #
4.1The name of the Assignment is:
Engineering, Procurement and Construction(EPC) for Distribution Lines and Substations

associated with the Seven New Medium Sized Power Stations in the Niger Delta Area:
The Project consists of EPC works and services for the Distribution Lines and Associated
Substations. The details of the scope of works presented in Lots are as shown in the Terms of
Reference.
Bidders are free to submit for several lots. Niger Delta PHCN reserves the right to award one or
several lots to one Bidder.
The name of the Client is: NIGER DELTA POWER HOLDING COMPANY OF NIGERIA PLC
(Niger Delta PHCN).
4.2(a) The objectives of these projects are to:
(a) Improve the quality of power to the areas and reduce power outage, system
losses thereby increase economic and social activities in the areas.
(b) Improve the stability of the National Transmission Grid and reduce the incidence
of system collapses and thereby increase the availability of the electricity supply
generally.
(c) Evacuation of power generation from the new power stations to load centres
4.2(b) The description of the Assignment to be carried out are:
i) Engineering, Procurement and Construction of Distribution Lines and

substations in the TOR.
ii) Performing all necessary activities involved in the implementation of the

projects in accordance with the respective construction contracts and
agreements under the projects.
4.3 Phasing of the Assignment (if any) Not Applicable
4.4 Pre-Proposal Site visit: Yes (On request)
4.5 The Client shall provide the following inputs:
- Designs specifications of other equipment not supplied by the Employer,

bill of material, etc.
- Preliminary survey drawings indicating proposed 33kV and 11kV routes.
22
4.6 The Invited EPC FIRMS are:
S/N PRE-QUALIFIED BIDDERS COUNTRY

1 VEE-TEK NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
2 INCOME ELECTRIX NIGERIA
3 MBH POWER LIMITED NIGERIA
4 CHRIS-EJIK INTERNATIONAL AGENCIES LIMITED NIGERIA
5 PEBAK INTERNATIONL LIMITED NIGERIA
6 MIDEN SYSTEM LIMITED NIGERIA
7 TECHNO-OZUA NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
8 TEE-JAY ASSOCIATES NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
9 BEST & CROMPTON ENGIEERING AFRICA LIMITED NIGERIA
10 CONTINENTAL ENGINEERING NIG. LIMITED NIGERIA
11 NEWS ENGINEERING NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
12 ANITA ENERGY LIMITED NIGERIA/SOUTH AFRICA
13 JUNOT CONSTRUCTION LIMITED NIGERIA
INTERNATIONAL TRADING TECHNICAL & NIGERIA
14 COMMERCIAL CONSULTANTS LIMITED
15 FELGEN NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
GIBSON ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION NIGERIA
16 COMPANY LIMITED
17 CHARNEL ENGINEERING LIMITED NIGERIA
18 HYPROPS NIG. LTD NIGERIA
19 PARAGON ENGINEERING NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
20 RMT/ CLEMESSY NIG LIMITED NIGERIA
21 NJONAS ENGINEERING COMPANY NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
22 ENG RYPAC LIMITED NIGERIA
23 NELSON C-STRABEK ENGINEERING LIMITED NIGERIA
24 FAN-VEN NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
25 MATELEC NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
26 RENACS ENGINEERING NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
27 RESA NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA
28 M. SCHNEIDER ENERGY LIMITED NIGERIA/AUSTRIA
29 OMEN INTERNATIONAL LIMITED NIGERIA
30 TALEVERAS CONSORTIUM NIGERIA
31 ALLIANCE ENERGY LMITED NIGERIA
32 SKIPPER /GTA CONSORTIUM NIGERIA/INDIA
33 CHEMO-TECHNICS LIMITED NIGERIA
34 POWER CONTROL APPLIANCES/SCHNEIDER NIGERIA
35 PAUWELS INTERNATIONAL N.V/GEMEX NIGERIA
36 SENERGI ENGINEERING LIMITED NIGERIA
37 INTERAF GROUP NIGERIA
38 SERMATECH NIGERIA LIMITED NIGERIA/EMIRATES
39 POWER SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY EEGENCO CANADA/NIGERIA
LIMITED
40 WATER TIDE DEV. COOMPANY LIMITED NIGERIA
23
4.7 The language of the Bid is: English.
4.8 i) A short listed firm may associate with another short listed firm.
Yes _ _ No _x__
ii) The same sub-contractor may participate in several proposals.

Yes __x _ No ___
iii) The estimated number of key site Supervisory staff months is

(To be advised by the Bidder)__
iv) Majority of key proposed staff to be permanent employees of the

Contractor: Yes _x__ No ___
iiv) Report must be written in the following language : English
4.9 Training is an important feature of this Assignment: Yes X_ No __
4.10 The number of copies of the proposal required is:

1 original +3 copies + 1 Electronic copy.
The address is:

Niger Delta PHCN PLC.
Federal Secretariat Complex.
Shehu Shagari Way
Central Area
Abuja-FCT
Nigeria
Attention: Engr. C.N.O. Nwachukwu, GM (Generation) - PHCN

+234 (09)413-5588 / cnonwachukwu@yahoo.com
or
C.U. Michael Osamor, SA (Hon. Minister) – Power and Steel
+234 (09)523-7067 / mosamor@yahoo.com
The information is:

Request For Proposal - for EPC of Distribution Lines and Substations
th
The date and time of proposal submission are: 24 April 2006, 4.00 pm.
4.11 Validity period (days, date): 180 days
The location is:
NIGER DELTA POWER HOLDING COMPANY OF NIGERIA PLC


Federal Secretariat Complex.
Shehu Shagari Way
24
Central Area
Abuja-FCT
Nigeria
4.12 The currency is: _Nigerian Naira_____
The source is: __Central Bank of Nigeria___
4.13 Financial negotiation: See addendum
4.14 Commencement of Contract Works (date, location): Immediately after the

Contract is signed.
Sincerely,
/Niger Delta Power Holding Company of Nigeria Plc, Nigeria/
25
Bid Proposal
FROM: TO:
. .
. .
. .
. .
Sir/Madam:
Subject: Bid for `Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC)

of Distribution Lines and Substations
Regarding Bid Submission
I/We . EPC contractors herewith enclose a Bid Proposal for supply and
construction of distribution lines and substations for selection of my/our firm/organisation as
Contractor for .
Yours faithfully,
Signature .
(Authorised Representative)
Full Name .
Designation .
Address __________ .
Power of Attorney to be attached hereto
26
Comments/Suggestions of Bidder
On the Terms of Reference (TOR):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
etc.
On the data, services and facilities to be provided by the Employer indicated in the TOR:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
etc
27
28
SECTION V TERMS OF REFERENCE
DISTRIBUTION LINES AND SUBSTATIONS

TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR)
For
EPC CONTRACTOR
5.1BACKGROUND
The National Economic Council has agreed to support the special funding of seven new medium
sized power stations (including associated transmission infrastructure; gas infrastructure and host
community distribution projects) in the Niger Delta Area (southern part of Nigeria). Requisite
funding for the execution of all the projects shall be provided and project implementation shall be
carried out on a fast track basis with the “first power” expected in the 1st. Qrt-2007. The scope of
the project shall comprise the following work:
i) Seven (7) new medium sized power stations shall be constructed at the following site
locations: CALABAR (Cross River State), EGBEMA (Imo State), EYAEN (Edo State),
GBARAIN/UBIE (Bayelsa State), IKOT ABASI (Akwa Ibom State), SAPELE (Delta
State) and OMOKU (Rivers State). The separate power station projects are described
hereinafter in more details:
- CALABAR, CROSS RIVER STATE

A Greenfield power station of about 500 MW to be located at a suitable site in Calabar,
Cross River State. Site identification/ acquisition are currently on-going. The power plant
shall be open cycle with provision for future extension to combined cycle. The power will
be evacuated to the Calabar 330/132 kV substation currently under construction via the
Calabar-Ikot Ekpene-Alaoji 330 kV Transmission Line currently under construction.
- EGBEMA, IMO STATE

A Greenfield power station of about 350 MW to be located at a suitable site in Egbema
(near Owerri, capital of Imo State). Site identification/ acquisition are currently on-going.
The power plant shall be an open cycle power plant with provision for future extension to
combined cycle. Power from this plant will be evacuated via a new dedicated 330 kV
double circuit line to the Owerri sub station.
- EYAEN, EDO STATE

A Greenfield power station of about 500 MW to be located at a suitable site in Eyaen
(near Benin, capital of Edo State). The power plant will be sited close to the proposed
new Benin North 330/132 kV substation (site identification/ acquisition is currently on-
going). The power plant shall be an open cycle power plant with provision for future
extension to combined cycle.
- GBARAIN/UBIE, BAYELSA STATE

A Greenfield power station of about 250 MW to be located at a suitable site in Gbarain-
Ubie (near Yenagoa, capital of Bayelsa State). Site identification/ acquisition are currently
on-going. The power plant shall be open cycle with provision for future extension to
combined cycle. Power from this plant will be evacuated via the Owerri-Ahoada-Yenagoa
330 kV double circuit Transmission Line.
- IKOT ABASI, AKWA IBOM STATE
29
This project will involve the addition of 3 X 90 MW steam turbines to the existing
ALSCON (Aluminium Smelting Company of Nigeria) 6 X 90 MW power station in a
combined cycle configuration, this includes the addition of six (6) Heat Recovery Steam
Generators (HRSG) to each of the Gas Turbines. Power evacuation will be through the
proposed Ikot Abasi-Ikot Ekpene - New Haven 330 kV double circuit Transmission Line
and the Calabar - Ikot Ekpene - Alaoji 330 kV double circuit Transmission Line with Ikot
Ekpene as the switching station.
The Client requests to add one (1) additionally Frame 9 GT to the existing AKWA IBOM
STATE Power Station. This Power Station is adjacent to the ALSCOM Power Station; the
same Switchyard may be used for Power evacuation.
- SAPELE, DELTA STATE

This 500 MW project could either involve the replacement of the four existing gas
turbines at NEPA’s Ogorode Power Station in Sapele, Delta State or the location of new
units at an adjoining location beside the existing power station.
- OMOKU, RIVERS STATE

This project is to be located adjacent to the 150 MW Rivers State Government power
plant (which is currently under construction). The proposed capacity of the power station
will be about 100 MW and shall be open cycle with provision for future extension to
combined cycle. Power from this plant will be evacuated via the on-going Rivers State
Government 132 kV double circuit transmission line and the proposed Omoku-Egbema-
Owerri 330 kV double circuit transmission line
(i.) The power stations shall be sited within range of existing/potential gas sources and necessary
gas pipeline projects shall be undertaken to deliver gas to the power plants.
(ii.) Associated transmission line and associated substations infrastructure will be built by EPC
Contractors to facilitate the connection of the new power stations to the national grid by using
the nearest existing transmission line or substation. The work also includes distribution projects
at various locations nationwide which will be used to evacuate power from Transmission
stations to various load centres.
The Steering Committee for the Development of Seven New Medium Sized Power Stations in the
Niger Delta (hereinafter referred to as the “Employer”), has awarded the Joint Venture of Lahmeyer
International GmbH, Germany, and O.T. OTIS Engineering, Nigeria, (hereinafter referred to as the
“Design Consultant”) the contract to execute the Design Consultancy Services under this Project
“Implementation for Seven New Medium Sized Power Stations in the Niger Delta Area”.
A separate Project Consultant shall each be appointed for the supervision, co-ordination and
management of each Lot of the projects.
Supply of line material / substation equipment, construction of lines and substations shall be
carried out for the following Lots:
30
LOTS FOR THE EPC PROJECTS

The scope of works for the Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) for the Distribution
Projects in Distribution Zones nationwide including the electrification of villages located within the
vicinity of the seven Power Plants shall be in Forty - Two(42) Lots as follows:
LOT NO. NO. OF PROJECTS ZONAL LOCATION

PER LOT
LOT D-EPC/AB1/1 7 Abuja Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/BN1/4 6 Benin Distribution Zone
LOT D-CPC/BN2/5 6 Benin Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/EK/1/9 7 Eko Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/EN1/13 7 Enugu Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/IB1/18 6 Ibadan Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/IB522 7 Ibadan Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/IK 1/23 9 Ikeja Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/JS-YL1/27 6 Jos-Yola Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/KD-KN1/31 5 Kaduna-Kano Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/KD-KN2/32 7 Kaduna-Kano Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/KD-KN/3/33 6 Kaduna-Kano Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/PH/1/36 8 Port Hacourt Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/PH2/37 5 Port Hacourt Distribution Zone
LOT D-EPC/PH5/40 5 Port Hacourt distribution Zone
31
PROJECTS IN ABUJA DISTRIBUTION ZONE
LOT D-EPC/AB1/1
1. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Idah (Lokoja Business Unit)
complete with the following:
- 15.5km of tee-off on Idah Junction 33kVline
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 7.8km; complete with HVDS cluster
of 101No. 50KVA Transformers.
2. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Kabba (Lokoja Business Unit)

- 0.1km of DC tee-off on Okene – Kabba 33kVline
3. Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV to 2X15MVA 33/11 kV injection substation at

Okene (Lokoja Business Unit) complete with the following
- Disconnection of existing 1 X7.5MVA,33/11kV transformer and replacement of
same with 2x15MVA 33/11kV transformers complete with all switchgear units and
accessories including renovation of the substation.
4a. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ayingba (Lokoja Business

Unit) complete with the following:
- 56km of 33kV SC line to Ayingba S/S
b. Construction of 1x2.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ohunene village (within the

vicinity of GEREGU POWER PLANT) (Lokoja Business Unit) complete with the
following:
- 0.95km of 33kV SC line from Geregu PS – proposed.
- 1No. 11kV feeder with a total route length of 14.39km complete with HVDS cluster
of 22No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
5. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ankpa (Lokoja Business Unit)

6. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Felele Lokoja (Lokoja Business

- 11.2km of 33kV SC line from Okene to Lokoja S/S
7. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Confluence beach (Lokoja

Business Unit) complete with the following:
32
- 0.1km of 33kV SC line Tee –off from Ajaokuta -Lokoja S/S
LOT D-EPC/AB2/2
1. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Dikko (Suleja Business Unit)
junction complete with the following:
- 0.1km of 33kV SC line Tee –off from Suleija TS – Jerei line
- 3No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 19.15km; complete with HVDS
cluster of 15No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV Transformers
2. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Zuba (Suleja Business Unit)

- 18km of 33kV SC line extension from Kubwa TS – Zuba S/S.
3. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Minna (Minna Business Unit)

- 11.05km of 33kV SC line Tee –off from Paliamentary feeder.
cluster of 75No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
4. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Kubwa (Wuse Business Unit)

- 7.8km of 33kV SC line Tee –off from Katampe TS – Bwari line
5. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Dei-Dei (Wuse Business Unit)

- 0.12km of 33kV SC line extension from Katampe - Jabi line.
cluster of 143No. 50KVA. Transformers.
6. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Dutse Alhaji (Wuse Business

- 0.12km of 33kV SC line Tee-off from Katampe TS– Bwari Line
cluster of 115No. 50KVA Transformers.
LOT D-EPC/AB3/3
1. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at University of Abuja
Gwagwalada (Garki Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 2.5km of 33kV SC line Tee –off from Games village feeder – University of Abuja
Gwagwalada S/S
cluster of 287No. 50KVA Transformers.
2. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Masaka (Garki Business Unit)

33
- 12.6km of 33kV SC line from Apo TS – Masaka S/S
of 309No. 50KVA Transformers
3. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Apo (Garki Business Unit)

- 3No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 11km; complete with HVDS cluster
4. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Nyanya (Garki Business Unit)

- 3.1km of 33kV SC line Tee –off from Apo TS – Mararaba S/S
- 3No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 10km; complete with HVDS cluster of
115No. 50KVA Transformers
5. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Kwali (Garki Business Unit)

- 32.6km of 33kV SC line from Suleija TS – Giri junction.
150No. 50KVA Transformers
6. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Lafia (Lafia Business Unit)

- 1km of 33kV SC line Tee –off from Lafia Mains S/S.
of 58No. 50KVA and 1No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
PROJECTS IN BENIN DISTRIBUTION ZONE
LOT D-EPC/BN1/4
1(a) Construction of 2X2.5MVA 33/11kV injection Substation located near the power
plant at Ihorbor (close to Benin) (Ugbowo Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 500m of underground 33kV cable route from the plant to the proposed
injection substation.
- 3No 11kV feeders with total route length of 17m
- Construction of HVDS cluster with a total of 57No 50kVA 11/0.415kV CSP
transformers in 8 villages.
(b). Construction/Uprating of 1X15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oluku (Ugbowo
- 21km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Benin North TS –Oluku 33kv Line.
of 14No. 50KVA and 1 no. 25KVA, 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
2. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Guinness (Benin)

(Akapakava Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Proposed Ihorbor PP – Ighomo 33kv Line
34
- 1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 10.5km; system change over from
6.6kv to 11kV complete with HVDS cluster of 86No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS
Transformers
3. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ighomo (Benin) (Akpakpava

Business Unit ) complete with the following:
- 15.7Km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Benin North TS – Ighomo 33kv Line.
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 5.8km; System change over from
6.6kV to 11kV complete with HVDS cluster of 103No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS
Transformers
4. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Iyekoba (Akpakpava

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Benin TS – Iyekoba (Etete) 33kv Line.
5. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Federal Secretariat (Benin)

(Akpakpava Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Benin North TS – Ighomo 33kv Line.
- 1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 5.55km ; complete with HVDS
cluster of 24No. 50KVA and 1No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
6. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Upper Sakponba (Akpakpava

- 5.25km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Benin TS – Ikpoba Dam 33kv Line
LOT D-EPC/BN2/5
1. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ukpilla (Afemesan
- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Okpilla TS – Okpilla 33kv Line.
2. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Igarra (Afemesan

- 1.21km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from OkeneTS – Ososo 33kv Line.
3. Construction/Uprating of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ekpoma (Afemesan

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Irrua TS – Ekpoma 33kv Line
of Nil 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
4. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Agenebode (Afemesan

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Irrua TS – Agenabode 33kv Line.
35
5. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Afuze (Afemesan

- 2km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Irrua TS – Uzebba 33kv Line.
of 18No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
6. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Auchi (Afemesan

- 0km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Irrua TS – Agenabode 33kv Line.
LOT D-EPC/BN3/6
1. Construction/Uprating of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Edjeba (Warri) (Warri
- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Effurun TS – Enerhen 33kv Line.
of 13No. 50KVA and 1No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
2. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Abraka (Warri

- 37.5km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Amukpe TS – Eku 33kv Line.
3. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ovwor (Warri

- 5.8km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Ughelli TS – Isoko 33kv Line.
4. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ekete (Warri Business

- 13km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Effurun TS – Enerhen 33kv Line.
5. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Otorwodo ( Warri Business Unit )

- 16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Ugheli TS – Otowodo S/S.
of 23No. 50KVA, 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
6. Uprating of 1x2.5MVA to 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Osubi injection substation at Ugheli (Warri

7. Uprating of 1x2.5MVA to 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oleh (Warri Business

Unit)
36
8. Additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV at Ogorode (close to Sapele) (Warri Business Unit)

- Construction of 2.9km 33kV DC line from Ogorode power plant to near the injection SS
and 525m extension of SC line to proposed SS
- Rehabilitation of the switchyard and the control room.
- Conversion of PHCN 6.6kV lines to 11kV and installation of HVDS cluster of 30No
50kVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers
9. Additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV to replace 1X7.5MVA 33/6.6KV at Amukpe (close to

Sapele) (Warri Business Unit) complete with the following:
- Rehabilitation of the existing control room and switch yard
- Reconstruction of 6.6kV line to 11kV line
LOT D-EPC/BN4/7
1. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Kwale (Warri Business
- 0.2km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Ughelli TS – Isoko 33kv Line.
2. Uprating of 1x2.5MVA to 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Issele-Uku

(Asaba Business Unit) complete with the following:
1No. 11kv feeder with a total route length of 0.25km.
3. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ubulu – Uku (Asaba

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Asaba TS – Asaba 33kv Line.
4. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ibusa (Asaba

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Asaba TS – Asaba 33kv Line
5. Construction/Uprating of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Agbor (Asaba

- 4.4km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Proposed Agbor TS – Agbor
33kv Line.
6. Construction/Uprating of 2.5MVA to 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Onicha –

Ugbo (Asaba Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Proposed Asaba TS – Asaba 33kv Line.
37
7. Construction/Uprating of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Asaba (Asaba
- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Asaba TS – Asaba 33kv Line.
LOT D-EPC/BN5/8
1. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oke – Aro (Akure)
(Akure Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 3.15km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Akure TS – Akure 33kv Line.
2. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Akure (Akure Business

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Akure TS – Akure 33kv Line.
of 47No. 50KVA , 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
3. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ore (Akure Business

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Ilesha TS – Okitipupa 33kv Line.
21No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
4. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ado-Ekiti (Ado-Ekiti

- 48.3km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Ilesha TS – Ado-Ekiti 33kv Line.
40No. 50KVA, 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
5. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ijero –Ekiti (Ado-Ekiti

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Ilesha TS – Efon Alaye 33kv Line.
6. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oye-Ekiti (Ado-Ekiti

- 0.16km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Okene TS – Omuaran 33kv Line.
7. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ise-Ekiti (Ado-Ekiti

- 2km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Akure TS – Ado Ekiti 33kv Line
8(a). Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Igede-Ekiti (Ado-Ekiti

- 0.26km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from akure TS – Ado Ekiti 33kv Line.
38
(b) Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at OMOTOSHO (Villages around

the Power Plant – Akure Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 1.5km complete with HVDS cluster of
8No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
PROJECTS IN EKO DISTRIBUTION ZONE
LOT D-EPC/EK1/9
1. Construction of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Ijora Causeway
(Ijora Business Unit)
Cause way complete with the following:
- 3No.11kV feeders with a total route length of 5.67km of O/H and 2.2KM of U/G
cable; complete with HVD cluster of 90No 50kVA 11/0.415Kv Transformers.
- Replacement of aged GEC (old) 11kV panels
- Rehabilitation of control building
2. Additional of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at NRC S/S ( Ijora Business Unit )
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 3.15km O/H and 0.72km U/G
complete with HVDS cluster of 78No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
- Replacement of aged 11kV panels
- Civil works rehabilitation in S/S for Flood prevention
3. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Onike-Yaba ( Ijora

- 3.68km 33kV U/G line from Akoka TS
4. Additional of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Iganmu (Orile) (Ijora Business

Unit ) complete with the following:
complete with HVDS cluster of 128No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
- Replacement of aged GEC unserviceable 11kV panels
- Civil works construction in S/S to prevent Flooding of the Station
- Rehabilitation of building
5. Construction of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV and replacement of 11kV old Reyrolle panels
at New Yaba Substation ( Mushin Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 3No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 7.56km;overhead and 1.58km U/G
Cable complete with HVDS cluster of 43No. 50KVA and 10No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV
CPS Transformers
6. Replacement of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Transformer at Beckley Injection Substation (Island

- 2.8km of 33kV 240mm2 x 3core XLPE U/G Cable and laying of same
from New Idumagbo to Beckley Substation
- 3No.11kV feeders with a total route length of 4.73km;150mm2 x3-core U/G
39
. Replacement of old 11kV panels
7. Construction of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation and

Replacement of 33 and 11kV indoor panels at New Idumagbo S/S [Island Business Unit]
- The existing 33kV outdoor switchyard to be converted to indoor type
- 6.1km of 33kV 240 x 3-core XLPE U/G from Alagbon-New Idumagbo and
Adeniyi Adele to New Idumagbo..
- 3No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 7.17km; complete with
HVDS cluster of 98No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
LOT D – EPC/EK2/10
1. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Water Front (Lekki Business
Unit] complete with the following:
- 2.1km of 33kV SC line by Teeing off from Ilasan Overhead Line.
2. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Abijo

([Lekki Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 1.47km of 33kV SC line by tee off from Ibeju-Lekki Overhead Line.
- 4No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 16km; complete with
HVDS cluster of 260No. 50KVA11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
3. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Ibeju (Lekki Business Unit)

- 26.25km of 33kV SC line by Tee off from Ibeju Lekki overhead line
- 4No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 40km; complete with HVDS
4. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation

at NEPA Close Victoria Island ( Island Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.95km of 33kV 240 mm2x 3 core XLPE U/G Cable, from Naval Dockyard to
NEPA Close.
5. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Oniru (V/I Ext) (Island

Business Unit)
complete with the following:-1.58km of 33kV SC line by teeing off from Ajah to
Chevron 33kV overhead Line.
6. Installation of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV Transformer at Fowler - Ikoyi injection

substation (Island Business Unit ) complete with the following:
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 10.08km U/G complete with HVDS
cluster of 0No. 50KVA and 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
- Replacement of aged 10No. 33kV indoor Panels
- Civils works in S/S to prevent Flooding in the S/station.
40
7. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5 MVA to 1X15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at
Alagbon TS Local ( Island Business Unit ) complete with the following:
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 8.72km complete with HVDS cluster
1. Installation of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV transformer at Kirikiri Substation ( Festac
Business Unit ) together with the following –
- 2No. 1kV feeders with a total route length of 8.4km; complete with HVDS cluster of
- Civil works construction to prevent flooding of S/S
2. Installation of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV transformer at Apapa Road TS ( Festac

Business Unit ) complete with replacement of old Reyrolle 11kV panels.
3. Uprating of 1x 7.5MVA with 1x 15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Tin

Can ( Festac Business Unit ) complete with the following:
- Replacement of 11kV panels
- Rehabilitation of Building
4. Construction of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Nitel

Injection Substation and Replacement of old Rayrolle 11kV panels ( Mushin Business
5. Construction of 2x 15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Ijesha ( Mushin Business

Unit )complete with
the following:
6 Construction of 3x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Isolo TS Local ( Mushin Business

Unit ) complete (with the following:
- 0.95km of 240mm2x 3-core U/G Cable to be drawn from existing 33kV bay
- 2km 11kV Feeders with total route length of 7.35km; complete with HVDS
cluster of 35No. 50KVA
1. Construction of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Orile Coker [Ijora
Business Unit] complete with the following:
- 3No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 6.3km of O/H and 2.6KM of U/G
cable complete with the following HVDS cluster of 90No 50kVA 11/0.415Kv and
30No 25kVA 11/0.415 Transformers.
41
2. .Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Festac 4th Avenue ( Festac
Business Unit ) complete with the following:-
- 2.94km of 33kV SC line Tee off from Festac 2 extension -Ojo 33kV overhead line
- 4No.11kV feeders with a total route length of 26.25km; complete with HVDS
cluster of 242No. 50KVA and 66No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
3. Construction of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Agbara TS (

Agbara Business Unit )
- 26.25km of 33kV SC line from proposed Agbara –Badagry 33kV overhead line -
3No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 50km; complete with
4. Construction of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Ajangbadi

( Agbara Business Unit ) complete with the following:
5. Construction of additional 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Ojo TS

local ( Agbara Business Unit ) complete with the following:
6. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Alaba International Market (

Agbara Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 5.22km; complete with HVDS cluster of
7. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Iba-LASU (Agbara Business

- 3.15km of 33kV SC line.
PROJECTS IN ENUGU DISTRIBUTION ZONE
LOT D – EPC/EN1/13
1(a). Construction of 2x2.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Eke ( Abakpa Business Unit )
- 0.45km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Udi – Ezeagu including system conversion
from 33KV to 11KV )
- Derating of existing 33kV to 11kV network and replacement of existing 7No.
33/0.415kV transformers with 54No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
- Disconnection and recovery of the 7No. 33/0.415kV Transformers.
(b). Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Trans Ekulu

( Abakpa Business Unit ) complete with the following:
- 11.0km of 33kV DC line
42
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 2.4KM complete with HVDS cluster of
2. Construction of1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Emene (Abakpa Business Unit)

- 2No.11kV feeders with a total route length of 2.95km complete with HVDS cluster of
3. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at NEW HAVEN (Ogui Business
- Okm of 33kV DC line
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 0.47km U/G and 4.28km O/H
4. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at TRADE FAIR ( Ogui Business
Unit )complete with the following:
- O.03km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off line)
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 2.3km O/H complete with HVDS
cluster of 37No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
5. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at LOMA LINDA ( Ogui Business
- 4.1km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off line)
6. Construction of1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Amechi ( Ogui Business Unit )

- 10.0km of 33kV DC line N/Haven — Amaechi S/S)
7. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Afikpo ( Abakaliki Business

unit ) complete with the following: ( Network conversion from 33KV to 11KV )
- 0.04km of 33kV DC line Tee-off
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 17.6KM complete with HVDS cluster
of 18No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV Transformers
1. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oko (Awka Business

- 0.05km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Nibo TS – Agulu)
43
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ekwulobia (Awka Business
unit ) complete with the following:
1.1km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Nibo – Agulu)
3. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Nri (Awka Business Unit)

4 (a) Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Fegge (Onitsha Business
- Existing 4No. 11kV feeders complete with HVDS cluster of 151No. 50KVA
11/0.415kV CPS Transformers 11KV U/G – 1.9KM and O/H – 4.85KM
(b) Installation of 2nd 15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Army Barracks (Onitsha
- Existing 2No. 11kV feeders complete with HVDS cluster of 51No. 50KVA
11/0.415kV CPS Transformers, 11KV O/H – 2.0Km and U/G – 0.15KM.
5. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Awkuzu (Onitsha Business

- 15km of 33kV SC line (Tee-off line)
- Derating of existing 33kV to 11kV network and replacement of existing 33/0.415kV
transformers with 83No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
- Disconnection and recovery of the 33/0.415kV Transformers.
6. Construction of 2x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Enugwu Ukwu ( Awka

- 7.3km of 33kV DC line (Dedicated line from Nibo TS)
7. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Agu-Awka ( Awka Business

- 0.1km of 33kV DC line ( Dedicated line from the new Agu – Awka TS )
8. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Umunze (Awka Business Unit)

- 0.11km 33kV DC line (Tee-off from NIbo TS-Agulu line)
44
1. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ihiala (Nnewi Business Unit )
complete with the following: (Network derating from 33KV to 11KV)
- 0.25km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from 2ND Onitsha TS- Nnewi)
transformers with 258No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
- Disconnection and recovery of the existing 33/0.415kV Transformers.
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oraifitte (Nnewi Business Unit

) complete with the following:
- 0.05km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from 2ND) Onitsha — Nnewi line
27No. 50 KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
3. Construction of1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Amichi ( Nnewi Business Unit )

complete with the following: ( System derating from 33KV to 11KV)
- 8.15km of 33kV DC line Tee-off Onitsha — Nnewi line I)
- 2No.11kV feeders with a total route length of 22.55km complete with HVDS cluster
4. Construction of2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Uruagu -Nnewi ( Nnewi

- .21km of 33kV DC line Tee-off Onitsha — Nnewi line I)
5. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oba Civic centre ( Nnewi

Business Unit ) complete with the following: ( Network conversion from 33KV to 11KV )
- 2.25km 33kV DC line (Tee-off on Onitsha TS –Obosi)
6. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ukpor ( Nnewi Business Unit )
complete with the following: ( Network conversion from 33KV to 11Kv )
- 0.1km of 33kV SC line (Tee-off from Nnewi – Ukpor-Lilu)
45
1(a). Construction of 1x2.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Kalabari Beach (Around
Egbema ( Orlu Business Unit ) complete with the following:
- 10km of 33kV DC line from EGBEMA POWER PLANT-S/S
- 2No.11kV feeders with a total route length of 11.55km.
(b) Construction 1X7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Egbema (Orlu Business Unit )
with the following:
- 2.2KM of 33KV DC line from Egbema power plant
- 2No.11kV feeders with a total route length of 9.25km
(c). Construction of 1x2.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Iyioka Village (Egbema) (Orlu
- 0.15km 33kV SC line (Egbema Power Plant- Orashi with special crossing to other
side of river)
- 1No. 11kV feeder with a total route length of 9km complete with HVDS cluster of
2. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Isuochi (Orlu Business Unit
)complete with the following:
3. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Orlu (Orlu Business Unit )
cluster of 60No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers (System Change Over).
4. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Mgbidi (Orlu Business Unit )
complete with the following: ( Network conversion from 33Kv to 11KV )
- O.3km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off Owerri-Ihiala 33kV line)
transformers with HVDS cluster of 59No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
- Disconnection and recovery of the existing 33/0.415kV Transformers.
5. Construction of 2x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Arondizuogu (Orlu Business

33/0.415kV transformers with HVDS cluster of 136No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS
Transformers.
6. Construction of 2nd 15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at ORJI (Owerri Business Unit )
46
- 9.8km of 33kV SC line ( Dedicated 33KV line from Egba TS )
7. Construction of 2nd 7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Akokwa (Orlu Business Uni t
) complete with the following:
cluster of 13No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers (System Change Over).
8 Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Azaraegbelu (Azaraegbelu

- O.1km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off line)- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route
length of 2.5KM complete with HVDS cluster of 47No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS
Transformers
1. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Aba TS ( Aba Business Unit )

complete with the following: ( System derating from 6.6KV to 11KV )
of 331No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers (system changeover from 6.6kV to
11kV).
2 (a). Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ogbor Hill (Aba Business Unit)
- 0.05km of 33kV DC line from Aba TS – Igi line
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 3.0km complete with HVDS cluster.
(b) Construction of 1x2.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at UMUOBASI –UKWU ss

(ALAOJI POWER PLANT) VILLAGE (Aba Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 2.km 33kV DC line (Tee-off from existing 33kV line)
3(a) Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at NDIOBU-OZUITEM (Umuahia

- 0.3km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Uzuakoli-Bende 33kV line)
cluster of 98No. 50KVA and 10No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS
(b). Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at OMOBA TOWN ( Aba
- 8.1km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off Aba – Umuahia line)
47
4. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at NKATA ALIKE ( Umuahia
- 0.05km of 33kV SC line (Tee-off line)
5. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at JDP SQUARE ( Umuahia

Business Unit )complete with the following:
6. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at OHAFIA ( Umuahia Business

7. Uprating of 2nd 7.5 MVA to 2nd 15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at AFARA
(Umuahia Business Unit ) complete with the following:
- 63km of 33kV SC line (Tee-off line)
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 1.95km (existing) complete with
HVDS cluster of 68No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers
PROJECTS IN IBADAN DISTRIBUTION ZONE
LOT D- EPC/IB1/18
1. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at APATA (Dugbe Business Unit)

2. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Apete (Dugbe Business Unit)

- 21km of 33kV SC line from Ibadan North TS – Proposed S/S
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 27.3km
3. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Jericho (Dugbe Business Unit)

- 20km of 33kV SC line from Jericho TS – Proposed S/S
of 20No. 50KVA and 23 No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
4. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Eruwa (Dugbe Business Unit)

- 68km of 33kV SC line from Aiyede TS – Proposed S/S
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 14.1 complete with HVDS cluster of
52No. 50KVA and 72No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
48
5. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Mokola Ibadan (Dugbe

- 0.49km of 33kV SC line from Agodi line 1 – Proposed S/S
4No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 6km complete with HVDS
6. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Samanda Ibadan (Dugbe

- 12.6km of 33kV SC line from Ibadan North TS – Proposed S/S
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 2.59km complete with HVDS
LOT D- EPC/IB2/19
1. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Akobo (Monatan
- 2km DC Tee-off from Ibadan TS – Adeogba SC 33kV line.
2. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Alakia/Adegbayi (Monatan

- 21km of 33kV SC line from Ibadan North TS – Proposed S/S
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 4.73km.
3. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Moniya (Monatan Business

- 1.5km of 33kV SC line from Moniya 33KV lina
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 26km (derating from 33/0.415kv
to 11/0.415kv T/F) complete with HVDS cluster of 154No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV
4. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Orita (Molette Business Unit)

- 6.5km of 33kV SC line from Aiyede TS – Proposed S/S
CPS Transformers
5. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Awe-Oyo (Oyo Business

6. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oyo Rd, Ogbomosho (Oyo

- 70.35km of 33kV SC line from Idofian TS – Proposed S/S
49
LOT D- EPC/IB3/20
1. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at IIesha Road, Ile-Ife (Ile-Ife
- 9.3km of 33kV SC line from Ile-Ife TS – Proposed S/S
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Iloko-Ijesha (Ile-Ife Business

- 4.1km of 33kV SC line from Ijebu - Ijesha
3. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Brewery Ilesha (Ile-Ife

- 12km of 33kV SC line from Ilesha TS – Proposed S/S
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 2km complete with HVDS
4. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ikamba Ijebu (Ijebu-Ode

5. Construction/Uprating of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ibadan Road (Ijebu

Ode Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.315km of 33kV DC line from Ijebu-Ode TS – Proposed S/S
6. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Mowe (Abeokuta Business

- 30.3km of 33kV SC line from Shagamu TS – Proposed S/S
LOT D – EPC/IB4/21
1. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Obasanjo Farm (Ota Business

- 0.32km O/H and 0.13km U/G of 33kV SC line from Otta Farm TS – Proposed S/S
.
2. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Abeokuta Road, Ota (Ota
- 8.4km of 33kV SC line from Otta TS – Proposed S/S
50
- 3No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 10.1km
3 Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ilogbo Road, Otta(Ota

- 40km of 33kV SC line from Otta TS – Proposed S/S
4. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Owode-Yewa (Ota Business

- 4.12km of 33kV SC line from Otta TS – Proposed S/S
5. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Papalanto (Ota Business Unit)

(within the vicinity of PAPALANTO POWER PLANT) complete with the following:
- 0.51km 33kV line from Power Plant to proposed S/S
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 66.22km complete with
6. Uprating of 1x7.5MVA to 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Iberekodo (Abeokuta

7. 2nd 15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Abiola way (Abeokuta Business Unit)
8. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Olomore (Abeokuta Business

LOT D – EPC/IB5/22
1. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oro (Ilorin Business Unit)
- 2km of 33kV SC line from Omu-Aran TS – Proposed S/S
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ojoku Rd, Offa (Ilorin

- 12.6km of 33kV SC line from Offa TS – Proposed S/S
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 4.73 km complete with HVDS cluster
of 53No. 50KVA and 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
51
3. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Idofian Road (Ilorin Business
- 3.15km of 33kV SC line from Idofian TS – Proposed S/S
4. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Tinumola (Oshogbo Business

- 4km of 33kV SC line from Oshogbo TS – Proposed S/S
5. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ilesha Road (Oshogbo)

(Oshogbo Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.63km 33kV DC Tee-off on Oshogbo TS – Kajola 33kV line
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 0.15km (to link up with existing 11kV
line) complete with HVDS cluster of 69No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
6. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Okuku (Oshogbo Business

- 0.1km of 33kV SC line Okuku
7. Additional 2nd 15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ikirun (Oshogbo Business Unit)
PROJECTS IN IKEJA DISTRIBUTION ZONE
LOT D- EPC/IK1/23
1. Construction of 2X15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Igbogbo (Ikorodu Business
- 7.9km 33kV line to the proposed substation from Ikorodu TS
2. Up rating 1X7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation to 1x15MVA at Epe (Ikorodu Business

Unit)complete with the following:
3. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ijede (Ikorodu Business Unit)

- 1.05km 33kV line T-off to the proposed SS on Ikorodu-Ijede 33kV feeder from
Ikorodu TS
52
4. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Agbowa (Ikorodu Business
5. Installation of additional 15MVA 33/11kV transformer at the existing Owutu 1X15MVA

injection substation at (Ikorodu Business Unit) complete with the following:
0.53km U/G 33kV line to the proposed substation
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 26km complete with HVDS cluster of
6 Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation Ajegunle (Ikorodu Business Unit)

- 0.53km U/G 33kV line to the proposed substation
7. Installation of additional of 1X15MVA 33/11kV power transformer at the existing

Odogunyan (Ikorodu Business Unit) injection substation complete with the following:
- 42km 33kV DC line on steel lattice tower structures from the proposed Erukan TS to
the proposed SS
- 2No 11 kV feeders with total route length of 10.5km complete with HVDS cluster of
841 No of 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers.
8. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation at Imota (Ikorodu Business Unit)

- 0.53km 33kV line T-off from Agbowa 33kV line
567No of 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers.
9. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation at Ipakodo, Ebute (Ikorodu

- 0.53km 33kV line T-off from Ibese 33kV line
- 2No 11 kV feeders with total route length of 23km complete with HVDS cluster of
LOT D- EPC/IK 2/24

1. Construction of 1X 15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at New Alausa (IKeja Business
- 0.54km U/G 33kV line from New Alausa TS to the proposed S/S
2. Construction of 1X 15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Adeniyi Jones (IKeja Business

- 0.74km U/G 33kV line to the proposed S/S
3. Installation of additional 1X15MVA 33/11kV power transformer at the existing Ogba- Ijaiye
Oke-Ira (IKeja Business Unit) Injection substation complete with the following:
- 2No 11kV feeders with total route length of 6.51km complete with HVDS cluster of
96N0 50KVA 11/0.415KV.
53
4. Additional 1X15MVA, 33/11kV injection substation at Magodu (Ojodu Business Unit)

-19.4km of 33kV line T-off from proposed DC 33kV line from Erukan TS and installation of
1.6km U/G cable to the existing Magodo 33/11kV Injection substation.
5. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation Agidimgbi (Ojodu Business Unit)

6. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation at Akute (Ojodu Business Unit)

- 31km 33kV line T-off from proposed 33kV DC line from Erukan TS to the
proposed SS.
7. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection at Olowora (Ojodu Business Unit) substation

- 16.5km 33kV DC line from Erukan TS to proposed SS
8. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation at Lambe in Ojodu (Ojodu

- 8.4km 33kV line from proposed Akute TS
9. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation at Agboyi Ojodu (Ojodu Business

- 31.5km 33kV line T-off from proposed Erukan DC 33kV line
- 2.6km 33kV line from New Alausa TS to the proposed SS
LOT D- EPC/IK3/25
1. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ejigbo (Oshodi Business Unit)

- 2.82km 33kV line from Ejigbo TS to the proposed SS.
2. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation at Mafoluku (Oshodi Business

- 2.6km 33kV line to the proposed substation from Isolo TS
54
3. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Aswani/Isolo Ind. Estate

(Oshodi Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 3km 33kV line to the proposed SS from Mushin TS
4. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at New Oworo (Shomolu

- 3km of 33kV SC line from Owor TS to the proposed S/S
5. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Mende/Maryland (Shomolu Business Unit) Injection

substation complete with the following:
- 3.68km 33kV line from Mary Land TS
.
6. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Mushin Local (Ilupeju) (Shomolu Business Unit)
Injection substation complete with the following:
- 8.4km 33kV line from Ilupeju TS
605No of 50KVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers.
7. Additional 1X15MVA, 33/11kV injection substation at Ogudu (Shomolu Business Unit)

injection substation complete with the following:
- 3.0km U/G and 0.2km OH 33kv DC line from Oworo TS to proposed SS
239No of 50KVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers.
8. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Abule Oja/68 Military (Shomolu Business Unit)

- 7.9km 33kV line from Akoka TS
- 4No 11 kV feeders with total route length of 14.33km complete with HVDS cluster
of 351No of 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers.
LOT D – EPC/IK4/26
1. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation at Shasha/Akowonjo (Alimosho
- 6.3km 33kV line from the proposed Alimosho TS
2 Installation of additional 1X15MVA 33/11kV power transformer at existing Igando Injection

substation (Alimosho Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.53km 33kV U/G line to the proposed transformer.
55
3. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Injection substation Abule Oki (Alimosho Business
- 11.05km 33kV line from proposed Alimosho TS
4. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Iju/Ope Ilu (Abule Egba Business Unit) Injection
- 5.25km 33kV line from proposed Akute TS
5. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Beckley Estate ,Agege (Abule-Egba Business Unit)

- 8.2km 33kV DC line from Ogba TS
6. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Abule Taylor (Abule-Egba Business Unit) Injection

- 13km 33kV line T-off from proposed Ogba DC 33kV line
- 4No 11 kV feeders with total route length of4.8km complete with HVDS cluster of
7. Construction of 1X15MVA 33/11kV Amikanle (Abule-Egba Business Unit) Injection

- 5.8km 33kV line from Ogba TS
8. Installation of additional 1X15MVA 33/11kV power transformer at the existing Ijegun

(Alimosho Business Unit) Injection substation complete with the following:
PROJECTS IN JOS AND YOLA DISTRIBUTION ZONES
LOT D- EPC/JS –YL1/27
1. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Lamingo (Jos Business Unit)

- 2.1km of 33kV DC line Tee-off from Jos TS – Makeri 33kV Line
2. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Zaria Road (Jos Business Unit)
- 8km of 33kV DC line Tee –off from JosTS – Busabuji 33kv Line
56
3. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Carwash (Jos Business Unit)

- 0.53km of 33kV DC Tee-off from JosTS – Rukuba 33kv Line
of 145No. 50KVA and 118No 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
4. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Saminaka (Jos Business Unit)

- 1.05km of 33kV DC Tee-off line from Jos Ts – Anguwa Bawa 33kv Line
5. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Gboko (Markudi Business Unit)

- 1.58km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from YandevTS – Gboko 33kv Line
6. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Otukpo (Markudi Business

- 9.45km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Asa –Upu Road 33kv Line
LOT D- EPC/JS –YL2/28

1. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Mararrabar Jama,a (Bukuru
- 5.25km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Jos TS – Dorowa 33kv Line
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Barkin Ladi (Bukuru Business

- Construction of 75KM of 33 KV O/H line from Jos TS - Dorowa
- 1.5km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Jos TS – Dorowa 33kv Line
3. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Pankshin (Bukuru Business

- 3.68km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Dorowa – Pankshin 33kv Line.
4. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Lantang (Bukuru Business

57
- 1.58km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Pankshin – Langtang 33kv Line
5. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Shendam (Bukuru Business

- 1.05km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Pankshin – Shendam 33kv Line
of 65No. 50KVA and 40No.11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
6. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Wase (Bukuru Business Unit)

- 35km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Dange town – Wase 33kv Line
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 1.5 km; complete with HVDS cluster
LOT D- EPC/JS-YL3/29
1. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Gombe Road, Bauchi (Bauchi
- 10km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Buachi TS – Gombe Road 33kv Line.
cluster of 125No. 50KVA and 60No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Misau Road, Azare (Bauchi

- 1.6km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Azare- Isawa Road 33kv Line
- 2No. 11kV feeder with a total route length of 8km; complete with HVDS cluster of
3. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Bauchi Road, Gombe (Gombe

- 9.67km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Gombe TS – Bauchi Road 33kv Line
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 28.5 km; complete with HVDS cluster
4. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at NTA, Maiduguri (Maiduguri

- 3.26km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Maiduguri TS – Baga Rd-Bulunkutu)
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 7.35 km complete with HVDS cluster
of 108No. 50KVA and 15 No. of 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
5. Construction/Uprating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Potiskum (Damaturu

- 3.26km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Potiskum TS – Geidam)
6. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Islamic Centre, Damaturu

(Damaturu Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.16km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Potiskum-Damaturu-Buniyadi)
58
of 78No. 50KVA and 10 No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
7. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Biu (Maiduguri Business Unit)

- 0.16km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Biu TS- Biu town)
of 159No. 50KVA and 28No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers (System
Change Over)
8 Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Bama (Maiduguri Business

- 15.75 of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Maiduguri—Bama- Gwoza)
of 122No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers (System Change Over).
LOT D- EPC/JS-YL4/30
1. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Mubi (Yola Business Unit)
- 0.16km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Damboa TS – Mubi)
of 25No. 50KVA and 18No. 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
2. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Old Power House,Yola (Yola
- 4.73km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Yola TS – Federal University of Technology,
Yola)
3. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Wukari (Jalingo Business

- 0.21 of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Yandev – Ibi)
of 5No. 50KVA
4(a). Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Jalingo (Jalingo Business
0.16km of 33kV DC line (Tee-off from Yola – Jalingo)
of 186No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers (System Change Over)
4(b). Construction of 1x2.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at CBN, Yola (Yola Business
- 0.32km of 33kV DC line Tee-off Yola TS – Yola 33k line I)
59
5. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Numan (Yola Business Unit)
- 4.2km of 33kV DC line (Extension of Yola- Numa line)
6. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Lassa (Yola Business Unit)

- 25km of 33kV SC Tee-off line from Askira- Uba Road 33kv Line
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 15km (Derating of Lassa town,
Lassa-Dille-Wuthlavu line) complete with HVDS cluster of 90No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV
CPS Transformers (System Change Over)
PROJECTS IN KADUNA AND KANO DISTRIBUTION ZONES
LOT D- EPC/KD-KN1/31
1. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Gonin Gora (Makera Business
- 24km of 33kV SC line from Mando TS to Gonin Gora TS
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Kagoro (Makera

Business Unit) complete with
the following:
- 0.4km of 33kV SC line by teeing off from Kafanchan 33kV line
3 Construction of additional 1x2.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Zambia Crescent

(Makera Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.9 km at 33kv SC line Tee-Off from Kaduna town rural feeder with a total route length
- 1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 1km; with HVDS cluster of 20No. 50KVA
11/0,415KV CSP Transformers.
4. Construction of 2x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Narayi (Makera Business Unit)

- 9km of 33kV SC line from Power Station to Narayi TS.
5 Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Kaduna Industrial Area

(Makera Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 8 km at 33kv SC line from Kaduna town TS to proposed.
- 1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 2km; with HVDS cluster of 20No. 50KVA
11/0,415KV CSP Transformers.
LOT D- EPC/KD-KN2/32
60
1 Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Air Force Base (Rigasa

- 0.1km of 33kV SC line Tee-off from existing Mando TS – Kawo feeder3 S/S.
1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 2.4km; (Dedicated Feeder)
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Airport (Rigasa Business

- 24km (To be confirmed) of 33kV SC line from Mando TS to Airport s/s.
- 1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 10km; complete with HVDS cluster
3. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Independence Way (Doka

- 6km of 11kV to be converted to 33kV SC line from power station to Independence
Way s/s.
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 3.4km O/H Cable; complete with
HVDS cluster of 66No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers.
4 Uprating of 2x7.5MVA to 2x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Dawaki (Doka

Business Unit) existing 2x7.5MVA S/S. complete with the following:
- 1No.11kV feeders with a total route length of 6km; complete with HVDS cluster of
19No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers
5. Construction of additional 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Jaji (Doka

- 39km of 33kV SC line from Mando TS to Jaji S/S.
1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 2km; (Dedicated Feeder)
6. Construction of 1x15MVA, 33/11KV injection S/S at Unguwar Dosa (Doka

- 15KM of 33KV SC line from Mando TS – Proposed injection S/S.

- 2No. 11KV feeders with total route length 10KM with 60No. 50KVA, 11?0.415KV
CSP transformers.
7. Replacement o1x2.5MVA with 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Birnin Gwari

(Rigasa Business Unit) complete with the following:
LOTS D – EPC/KD-KN3/33
1. Uprating of 1x7.5MVA to 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Makarfi (Zaria
Business Unit)
- 10km ( To be confirmed) of 33kV SC line from Zaria TS to Makarifi Substation
2. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at ABU Samaru (Zaria Business

61
- 3km of 33kV SC line from Zaria TS –ABU Samaru TS.
3. Replacement of 1x2.5MVA with 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Rinjin Sambo

(Sokoto Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.1km of 33kV SC line .
-1No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 1km; complete with HVDS cluster
4. Construction of additional 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Fadama (Birnin

Kebbi Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 2No. 11kV feeders ( Existing)
5. Construction of 1x15MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at NNPC Junction (Gusua

- 0.4km of 33kV SC line by teeing off from Maru 33kV overhead line to NNPC
Junction S/S.
6 Construction of additional 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV Injection Substation at Dukku (Birnin Kebbi

- 1No. existing 11kV feeders with a total route length of 2km; with HVDS cluster of
11No. 50KVA 11/0,415KV CSP Transformers.
LOT D – EPC/KD-KN4/34
1. Up rating of 1X 7.5MVA 33/11kV to 2x15MVA injection substation at Gongoni Road,
Sharada, (Dala Business Unit) Kano complete with the following: 33KV Kumbotso –
Gongoni SC – 3.7KM
- 11kV feeders with a route length of 2.4km; complete with HVDS cluster of 7No.
50KVA and 3No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CPS Transformers
2. Construction of Stadium 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Kofarmata, (Dala

Business Unit) Kano complete with the following:
- 0.63km of 33kV SC T-off from Danagundi-Kurna 33kV line to the proposed
Substation. 2no 11KV feeders with a total route length of 1.85km complete with
HVDS Cluter of 10no. 50kvA 11/0.415 and 9no. 25kvA 11/0.415kv CSP TRFS
3. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Farm Center, (Nassarrawa

Business Unit) Kano complete with the following:
- 20.1km of 33kV SC line T-off from kubotso-Zaria Road 33kV line to the proposed
S/S
4- Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Wudil (Nassarrawa

Business Unit) complete with the following: Dutse – Wudil 33kv SC Line – 15.6KM
62
5. Construction of 2x7.5MVA Rijiya Zaki 33/11kV injection substation (Dala Business Unit)
- 7.6km of 33kV SC line from proposed Kumbtso TS to Bayero University new site.
6. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV PRP (Airport Road) injection substation (Dakata

Business Unit) at Kano complete with the following:
- 2.21km of 33kV SC line T-off from 33kV feeder 2 on Dakata TS to the Proposed
S/S. 2no. 11kv Feeders with a total ruote length of 1.55km complete with HVDS
Cluster of 5no. 50kvA 11/.415kv and 3no. 25kvA 11/.415kv CSP TRFS
7. Up rating of 1x2.5MVA 33/11kV Dakatsalle injection substation to 1X7.5MVA (Kumbotso

- 2.84km of 33kV SC line tee-off from existing Bagauda 33kv feeder to proposed
S/S
LOTS D – EPC/KD-KN5/35
1. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Katsina GRA (Katsina
- 2.9km of 33kV SC line T-off from Ajiwa feeder to the proposed S/S
2. Up rating of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Dutse to 2X7.5MVA (Dutse

- 1.05km of 33kV SC line Dutse TS to the proposed SS
- 2No 11kV feeders with a total route length of 6.3km complete with HUDS 2no.
50kVA 11/0.415kv CSP T/FS
3. Uprating of 1x7.5MVA to 2X7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Hadeija (Dutse

- 1No. 11kV feeder with a route length of 1.9km
4. Construction of additional 1X7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Musawa (Katsina

- All civil & Electromechanical works as for new s/s
5. Construction of 1X7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation Kofar Sauri (Katsina Business

- 3.5km of 33kV SC line T-off from existing Ajiwa Water works line
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 0.84km of new construction.
6. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV Daura Injection substation (Katsina Business Unit)

- 0.16km of 33kV SC line T-off from Katsina-Daura 33kV line to the proposed SS.
63
7. Uprating of 1x2.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Kazaure to 1X7.5MVA (Dutse

- Disconnection/recovery of 1 No of 2.5MVA power transformer to PHCN stores
8. Uprating of 5MVA to 1X7.5MVA33/11kV Gumel injection substation (Dutse Business Unit)

- 1No. 11kV feeder with a total route length of 1km
9. Up rating of 2.5MVA 33/11kV Malammadori injection substation to 1X7.5MVA (Dutse

- 1no. 11kV feeder with a total route length of 1.5km complete with HVDS cluster of
2no. 50kVA 11/.415kV CPS Transformers
PROJECTS IN PORT HARCOURT DISTRIBUTION ZONE

LOTS D – EPC/PH1/36
1. Construction of 2nd 15 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ogoja (Ikom/Ogoja Business

- 8.61km of 33kV SC from Obudu TS- Ogoja injection substation
- 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 27.8km complete
2. Construction of 2x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Itigidi (Ikom/Ogoja Business

- 0.1km of DC tee-off on Ikom TS-Ugep -Itigidi 33kV line
of 61No. 50KVA and 7No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers
3. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Obudu (Ikom/Ogoja Business

- 9.05km of 33kV SC from Obudu TS- proposed injection substation
4. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ugep (Ikom/Ogoja Business

- 37.5km of 33kV SC from Ikom TS- Ugep injection substation
5. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Okuku (Ikom/Ogoja Business

- 3.36km of 33kV SC from Obudu TS- Okuku injection substation
0No. 50KVA and 0No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers
6. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Obubra (Ikom/Ogoja Business

- 3.41km of 33kV SC from Ikom TS- Obubra injection substation
64
of 12No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers
7. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ediba (Ikom/Ogoja Business

- 0.89km of 33kV SC from Ikom TS- Ediba injection substation
8. Construction of 2nd 15 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ikom (Ikom/Ogoja Business

- 15.55km of 33kV SC from Ikom TS- Ikom injection substation
LOT D – EPC/PH2/37
1. Construction of 2x7.5MVA, 33/11kV Injection Substation at Calabar (Calabar Business
- 0.78km of 33kV DC line from the power plant: A cct to pick the Inj. S/S and the
other cct to pick existing 33kV line as the new Itu feeder.
- Radiate 2No. 11kV feeders with a total route length of 12.7km complete with HVDS
2. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Diamond Hill (Calabar

- 0.5km of 33kV SC from Calabar TS- Diamond Hill injection substation
3. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Esuk Utan (Calabar Business
- 2.94km of 33kV SC from Calabar TS- proposed injection substation
4. Construction of 2x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Old CRUTECH Pavallion

(Calabar Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 3.99km of 33kV SC from Calabar TS- Crutech injection substation
5. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Amika (Calabar Business

cluster of 80No. 50KVA and 48No. 25KVA 11/0.415kV CSP Transformers
65
1. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Onna (Uyo Business Unit)
- 0.5km of 33kV SC from Eket TS- Onna injection substation
2. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Etinan (Uyo Business Unit)
- 0.05km of 33kV SC from Uyo TS- Etinan injection substation
3. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ibesikpo (Uyo Business Unit)
- 5.25km of 33kV SC from Uyo TS- Ibesikpoinjection substation
4. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Abak (Uyo Business Unit)

- 14.7km of 33kV SC from Uyo TS- proposed injection substation
5. Uprating of existing 1x7.5MVA Injection Substation to 2X7.5MVA, 33/11kV S/S at IKOT

ABASI (Uyo Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 1.2km of 33kV DC line from the power plant: A cct to pick the Inj. S/S and the other
cct to pick existing 33kV line as the new Ikot Abasi 33kV feeder.
- Radiate 1No. 11kV feeder with a total route length of 6km complete with HVDS
6. Construction of 1x7.5MVA, 33/11kV Injection Substation at Ikot Akama in IKOT ABASI

(Uyo Business Unit) complete with the following:
- 0.15km of 33kV SC line to link the proposed injection substation.
- Radiate 2No. 11kV feeder from the injection substation, extend the existing 33kV
network by 4.25km and install HVDS cluster of 36No. 50KVA 11/0.415kV CPS
Transformers
.
1. Construction of 2x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Oyigbo (Borikiri Business
- 3km Afam TS – Oyingbo Inj. S/S 33kV line
2. Construction of 2x15 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Borokiri (Borikiri Business

- 2.94km of 33kV SC line from PH Town TS – Borikiri Inj. S/S
- Rehabilitation of 33kV SC line from PH TownTS – Borokiri injection S/S
66
3. Construction of 1X7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Bori (Borikiri Business Unit)

- 3.15km of 33kV SC from P.H Main TS-Bori injection substation
4. Construction of 1x15 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Eastern by-pass (PH) (Borikiri
- 3.78km of 33kV SC from P/H Mains TS- Eastern Bye-Pass injection substation
5. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Eleme (Borikiri Business Unit)
junction complete with the following:
- 0.21km of 33kV SC from P/H Mains TS- Eleme Junction injection substation
LOT D-EPC/PH5/40
1. Construction of 2x15 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Abuloma (Borikiri Business

- 4.68km PH Mains TS – Abuloma Inj. S/S 33kV line (2.31km of DC O/H and
2.37km of SC)
2. Construction of 2x15 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Woji (Borikiri Business Unit)
- 3.84km PH Mains TS – Woji Inj. S/S 33kV Line (2.63km of DC O/H , 1.05km of SC
O/H and 0.16km of U/G)
3. Construction of 2x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Orazi (Diobu Business Unit)
- 0.32km of 33kV SC from P.H. Mains - Orazi injection substation
4. Construction of 2x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Sch. Of Health Tech. (Diobu
- 6.41km of 33kV SC from P.H. Town TS- Sch. Of Health Tech. injection substation
5. Construction of 1x15 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Eliozu(E/W-Okporo) (Diobu

- 0.32km of 33kV SC from P.H. Mains TS- Eliozu injection substation
67
LOT D-EPC/PH6/41
1. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Isiokpo (Ahoada Business
- 0.32km of 33kV SC from TS- Isiokpo injection substation
2. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at OMOKU (Ahoada Business

3. Construction of 1x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at ELIETA/OMOKU (Ahoada

- 10km 33kV SC line (Extension of Power Plant-Omoku 33kV line)
4. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Elele (Ahoada Business Unit)
- 0.42km of 33kV SC from TS- Elele injection substation
5. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Abua (Ahoada Business Unit)
- 2km of 33kV SC from Ahoada TS- Abua injection substation.
6. Construction of 2x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ahoada (Ahoada Business

Unit). complete with the following:
- 0.47km of 33kV SC from Kubwa TS- proposed injection substation
LOT D-EPC/PH7/42
1. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Degema (Ahoada Business
- 25.6km of 33kV SC&1.7KmU/G Cable from Ahoda to Degema Injection subsection.
- 2No11kV feeders with a total route length of 16.7km complete with HVDS cluster of
2. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Abonnema (Ahoada Business

68
3. Construction of 1x15 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Opolo (Yenegua Business

- 23.95km of 33kV SC from Yenagoa TS- Opolo injection substation
4. Construction of 1x7.5 MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Swali (Yenegua Business

- 39.32km of 33kV SC from Yenagoa TS- Swali injection substation
5. Construction of 2x7.5MVA 33/11kV injection substation at Ovom (Yenegoa Business

- 29.97km of 33kV SC from Yenagoa TS- Ovom injection substation
6. Construction of 2x7.5MVA, 33/11kV Injection Substation at Gbarian/Ubie (Yenegoa

- 1.1km of 33kV DC line; A cct to pick the Inj. S/S and the the other cct to pick
existing 33kV line as the new Mbiama feeder.
The Bidders are requested to quote for at least one Lot. Niger Delta PHCN reserves the right to
award one or several lots to one Bidder.
5.2 SCOPE OF E.P.C. CONTRACTOR
The objectives of Contractor’s scope for each Lot are:
 Design, manufacture, supply and delivery of some key equipment/

materials not supplied by the Client, such as distribution transformers,
tripping units, substation automation system, concrete poles etc
 Inspection of Manufacturing process by the Employer’s Engineers of

distribution transformers, substation automation system and concrete poles.
 Factory Acceptance tests for distribution transformers and concrete poles.
 Training of Employer’s Personnel on the erection, operation and

maintenance of distribution lines and substation.
 Provision of all relevant design, construction and “as built” drawings

including operational and erection manuals of equipment supplied by the EPC
contractor
 Supply of other Line materials and other Substation equipment not

supplied by the Employer.
69
 Provision of proper storage of all equipment/materials in the site store(s)
approved by the Employer
 Survey of the proposed 33kV and 11kV line routes based on the
preliminary survey drawings provided by the Employer
 Design and construction of Distribution lines and substations
 Testing and commissioning of Distribution lines and substations.
 Transfer of know-how to the Employer’s personnel
 Provision of site security and Engineers’ transport throughout the project

duration
 Certification and submission with the bid his purchase agreement with a
manufacturer/supplier for minimum manufacturing/delivery capacity for six
months for some key equipment/materials (to be indicated in the Schedules)
and must demonstrate, that based on known commitments, they will be
available for use in the project.
5.2.1 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (DLP)
The Defect liability period (DLP) is planned to be twelve (12) months after the provisional
taking over of the project. During this period, all defects in design and installation of any
equipment/material shall be rectified by the EPC contractor at their cost. The EPC
contractor shall also during the period furnish all the queries / questions raised by Employer
via e-mail and facsimile correspondence.
5.2.2 TESTING AND INSPECTIONING OF EQUIPMENT
5.2.2.1 General
The whole of the plant and equipment provided under the contract shall be subject
to inspection and test by the Engineer and/or any other agency as nominated by the
Engineer during and after manufacture (factory tests), erection and on completion.
The approval of the Engineer of the results of any such inspection or test shall not
prejudice the right of the Employer to reject the plant if it fails to comply with the
specification when erected or to give complete satisfaction in service.
5.2.2.2 Quality Assurance Program

In general terms, the manufacturing quality assurance program must be in
compliance with ISO 9001 standards. The employer reserves the right to verify the
document pertaining to the manufacturers’ quality assurance programs, as well as
the application of the same in the manufacturing plants.
70
The plant and equipment and any part of the Facilities provided under the Contract
shall be subject to quality inspections and tests by the Employer (or his designated
Representatives), during manufacture, erection and on completion.
The cost of all inspection and tests including the provision of the necessary test
equipment, whether at the manufacturer’s works or on site, shall be borne by the
Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. Two
Representative of the Employer shall witness each factory test or inspection of
manufacturing works. For each visit out of Nigeria, all traveling expenses including
return tickets, accommodation, feeding, daily out of pocket expenses, etc for the
Employer’s Representatives shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
5.2.2.3 Visit to manufacturer’s work during manufacture

During the manufacture of the key equipment/materials (distribution transformers,
concrete poles and station automation system) the Contractor shall arrange for each
equipment a minimum of three(3) Employer’s Representatives to visit the assembly
plant and inspect the manufacturing process at an agreed and appropriate stage to
assess the quality of materials and workmanship.
Program of visits for inspection shall be included in the Bid.
5.2.2.4 Witnessing of Factory tests

The Contractor shall arrange for a minimum of four (4) of the Employer’s
Representatives to witness factory tests for the major equipment ((distribution
transformers, concrete poles and station automation system).
Program of visit for witnessing of factory tests shall be included in the Bid.
5.2.2.5 Site Tests

The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of all plant for site inspection
and tests as required by the Engineer. During the course of erection, the Engineer
shall have full access for inspection of the progress of the work and checking
workmanship and accuracy as may be required. On completion of the work, prior to
commissioning, all equipment shall be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer to
demonstrate that it is entirely suitable for commercial operation.
71
5.2.2.6 Test Certificate
Triplicate sets of principle test records, test certificates, and performance curves
shall be supplied for all tests carried out in accordance with the provisions of this
contract. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied
for all tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Engineer. The
information given on such test certificates and curves shall be sufficient to identify
the material or equipment to which the certificate refers, and shall bear the contract
reference and heading.
5.2.2.7 Rejection of Plant

Any item of plant or component which fails to comply with the requirements of this
specification in any respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection
or on completion at site may be rejected by the Engineer either in whole or in part as
he considers necessary. After adjustment or modification if so directed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the item for further inspection and/or tests.
Plant or components with defects of such a nature that the requirements of this
specification cannot be fulfilled by the adjustment or modification, shall be replaced
by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5.2.2.9 Expediting
Before any equipment is packed or dispatched from the main or the sub-contractor’s
works,all tests called for should have been successfully carried out.
Adequate notice shall be given when the plant is ready for inspection or test and
every facility shall be provided by the Contractor and his sub-contractors to enable
the Engineer carry out the necessary inspections and tests.
5.3 TRAINING
The satisfactory training of the Employer’s staff in the operations, maintenance and
repairs of all systems and equipment shall receive the highest priority. The
Employer’s staff shall be involved in all aspects of installation, commissioning and
testing to thoroughly familiarize them with the equipment.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing sufficient training to the Employer’s
staff to enable them to operate, maintain, diagnose and locate faults, repair and
expand the entire range of installations from commissioning date. The contractor
shall continuously review the effectiveness of the training and shall inform the
72
Employer in writing if at any time it is his opinion that the training programme is not
operating to meet the required objectives. The contractor shall inform the Employer
in writing of the necessary changes or additions required to meet the objectives.
5.3.1 Scope of Training:

Training shall be organized by the contractor for the Employer’s engineers,
technicians and substation operators. These personnel shall generally be proficient
in the skills appropriate to their occupations. The training shall be in two phases
namely foreign and local training.
Training courses shall be provided covering all the supplied equipment, including,
but not limited to, the following subjects:
(a) preventative and routine maintenance

(b) fault finding, diagnosis and rectification
(c) operation of the equipment
For each proposed training course, the bidder shall propose a suitable programme
and shall provide the following information:
(i ) assumed level of expertise of participants
(ii) scope and depth of material to be covered
(iii) expected duration of course
(iv) maximum number of participants
(v) facilities required by way of equipment, teaching equipment etc
vi) proposed location of course (i.e. manufacturer’s works, third party l
location etc).
(vii) sample curriculum vitae of proposed course instructors
In addition to the site training, the training shall as a minimum include three weeks
foreign training on the distribution transformer for six (6No.) engineers and another
three weeks foreign training on the substation automation equipment for six (6No.)
engineers.
Apart from the site training, the contractor shall arrange for training session to hold
at their Abuja office or another location as may be agreed with the Employer where
lecture room and teaching aid facilities shall be provided. This class room training
73
shall augment the site training. The site and class room trainings shall each be
organized for a minimum of 12 (twelve) engineers and technicians
The cost of the local training programmes including the provision of training
materials, snacks, lunch etc shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed
to be included in the Contract Price. For each of the foreign training programmes, all
traveling expenses including return tickets, accommodation, feeding, daily out of
pocket expenses, etc for the Employer’s Engineers shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price.
5.4 MANDATORY AND RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
5.4.1 General
This chapter describes the requirements of spare parts for the equipment. The
spare parts required in accordance with this chapter are intended to be ordered
together with the supply of equipment. All spares supplied shall be new, unused
and strictly interchangeable with the parts for which they are intended to be
replaced.
5.4.2 Requirements
For the normal replacement spare parts, the contractor shall prepare his own
proposals. In making these proposals, he shall keep in mind that the climatic
conditions shall be very severe which may cause more rapid deterioration of some
parts of the equipment than usual in supplier’s countries. The proposal shall be
made on the basis of 3 years’ requirement of spare parts and shall be included in
the Price Schedule.
5.4.3 Schedule for Spare Parts

The contractor shall enclose with the bid a list of recommended spare parts for
consideration with corresponding prices for each item including packing. The
Schedule for the spare parts is included in this Bid Document.
5.4.4 Packing
The mandatory spare parts shall be treated and packed for long storage under the
specified climatic conditions. Each spare part shall be clearly marked or labeled on
the outside of its packing with its description and purpose and, when more than one
74
spare is packed in a single case shall be shown on the outside of such case or
container and a detailed list enclosed. All cases, containers or other packages shall
be marked and numbered in an approved manner for purposes of identification. All
cases, containers or other packages are liable to be opened for examination and
packing shall be designed to facilitate opening and thereafter repacking.
5.4.5 Decommissioned Equipment

All decommissioned equipment are to packaged, labeled and stored appropriately
under suitable condition and handed over to the Engineers with their
comprehensive list detailing the items/material/equipment.
5.5 CUSTOM AND IMPORT DUTIES/PORT CLEARANCE/LOCAL TRANSPORT
All prices in the Price Schedules on manufactured equipment imported into Nigeria
shall be deemed to exclude Custom/Import Duties.
The Employer shall provide the Custom & Import Duty Exemption Certificate to
enable the contractor clear all equipment/materials imported to Nigeria Port. After
clearing the equipment/materials from the Port, the contractor shall transport same
to the designated project site as provided in Price Schedules.
The Port Clearance charges, VAT and other related charges shall also be paid by
the contractor and the invoices submitted to the Employer for reimbursement.
5.6 Experience of EPC Contractor’s Sub-Suppliers and Key Personnel on Site
5.6.1 EPC Contractor’s Sub-Suppliers
5.6.1.1 The EPC Contractor shall have assured access to his intended sub-suppliers as
qualified manufacturers for supply of equipment and materials which are under the
contractor’s scope of supply; meeting the mentioned minimum requirements listed in
this document and must demonstrate that based on known commitments they will
be available for supply of line material / substation equipment in the proposed
contract.
5.6.1.2 The bidder’s sub-suppliers should have designed, manufactured, tested, and
supplied with satisfactory service experience line material/ substation equipment for
the last ten years. The offered material/substation equipment shall be of high quality
material.
As a reference for evaluation, in addition to above requirements, the bidder is to

ensure he submits documentary proof of the specified manufacturing experience for
individual material/ equipment mentioned hereunder, from his intended sub-
suppliers with his bid:
- the type test certificates
75
- a list of at least five purchasers of material/ equipment giving time of delivery,
quantities supplied and full name and addresses of these purchasers.
- Sample tests and routine tests shall be made as per international standards,
stipulations of the specification, manufacturing quality plan submitted for each such
material/ equipment submitted by the bidder or/ and his sub-supplier.
5.6.1.3 Sub-Suppliers Manufacturing Capacities
The minimum manufacturing capacities of the suppliers shall be indicated in the

Schedules
5.6.2 EPC Contractor’s Key Personnel on Site
(I) The Project Manager shall be an electrical engineer with at least 20 years
experience in substation and Distribution line at similar or higher voltage
level. Out of the 20 years of experience, the PM shall have at least 5 years
design office experience and construction of Distribution lines and
substations. He should have headed at least two (2) Distribution projects in
the recent past similar to the one he will be in charge of, under this contract.
The Project Manager shall have a good knowledge of English for co-
ordination and report writing purposes.
(II) The Site Engineers shall be electrical engineers with at least 10 years
experience in Distribution Lines/Substations. He should have proven
experience in stringing of distribution lines.
For Substations, he should have proven experience in construction, testing

and commissioning of MV substations for at least two (2) independent
substation projects. Photographs of the substation projects may be
enclosed with the bid.
(III) Electrical Engineers (Permanent Supervisors) He shall have at least 5

years experience in the field of substation, line construction, and stringing
with tension stringing equipment.
(IV) Civil Engineers -He shall have at least 5 years experience in the field of
substation and towers/pole foundations in marshy or high water table areas.
Photographs of individuals constructing foundations in marshy or high water
table locations may be enclosed.
5.7 VOID
5.8 VOID
5.9 DEADLINE AND LOCAL SERVICES OF THE CONTRACTOR
For each LOT, the duration of the Contractor’s mission until provisory take-
over of the whole works is estimated to be NINE ( 9) MONTHS. The Defects
Liability Period shall last for twelve (12) months during which, the contractor’s
resources, for any defect observed, shall be available for modification/ replacement.
5.10 FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
76
For supervising site works the Contractor shall acquire:
5.10.1 Personnel
For each Lot, the Contractor shall provide at least supervisory staff, listed below
throughout the duration of the project.
 Project Manager (Electrical) : 1 No.

 Site Engineers (Electrical) for line & substation: 2 No.
 Engineer (Civil/Structural) for line & substation: 2 No.
 Surveyors 2No.
 Draughtsmen for line: 1 No.
 Support Staff (Administrative Officer,
Secretary/typist, Technicians, Drivers,
Security Guards, etc: As required
These personnel shall be supported by other experts on call (who shall visit the site
as need be) from the Contractors office.
5.10.2 Project Facilities and Equipment
For each Lot, the Contractor shall provide the following project facilities and
equipment:
5.10.3 Project Office

For each Lot, the contractor shall secure/acquire a project office located
in the most strategic and developed town within the vicinity of the projects. The
choice of the town shall be subject to the Client’s approval. The contractor shall
provide within the premises of the Project office and for the exclusive use of the
Client’s Engineers, a well furnished office complete with facilities as listed below:
1. Air-conditioner
2. Toilet, Shower, Hand basin with at least cold water supply
3. Adequate office furniture, i.e 2No. lockable desk, 4No. chairs, 1No. filing cabinet
4. Electricity supply on a 24-hour basis
5. Folding bed, blankets
6. 1No. Desk top computer complete with printer and all peripherals
7. !No. photocoping machine
8. 1No. Refrigerator
The offices shall be cleaned daily by the contractor and kept in good condition.
The Engineer’s office shall be equipped with radio communication facilities on

contractor’s frequency range.
In the event that a conducive office is not avalable for the Client’s Engineers, one
Porta-cabin office fully equipped with the facilities listed above shall be provided.
They shall be located according to the Employer’s request and shall be available
upon the arrival of the Contractor’s staff at site.
77
These equipment, whose technical data shall be approved by the Client for the
project shall be returned undamaged and in good operating state to the Employer.
5.10.4 Site Office

For each project site in a Lot, the contractor shall provide a portakabin fully
furnished as listed in section 5.10.3 for the exclusive use of the Client’s Engineers.
The portakabin shall be located at the injection substation related to the project.
The office shall be cleaned daily by the contractor and kept in good condition.
The Engineer’s office shall be equipped with radio communication facilities on

contractor’s frequency range.
As in section 5.10.3 all the site office equipment, whose technical data shall be
approved by the Client for the project shall be returned undamaged and in good
operating state to the Employer.
5.10.5 Engineer’s Accommodation

For each Lot, the contractor shall secure/acquire at least one fully furnished duplex
(minimum of 6-bedroom) accomodation for use by the Employer’s Engineers on site
visit. The house shall be furnished with at least 1No. Television, 1No. Refridgerator,
Air conditioning units (in all the rooms), electric/gas cooker etc. The contractor shall
also provide 24-hour security services, gardeners, stewards etc
The place of accommodation shall be in the most strategic and developed town
within the vicinity of the projects. The choice of the town shall be subject to the
Client’s approval. The accomodation shall be available until the final taking over of
the projects.
5.10.6 Transportation for the Employer’s Engineers

For each Lot, the contractor shall provide 4No. air-conditioned vehicles for use of
Employer’s Engineers. The vehicles shall be 2No. Toyota Corolla Saloon cars (2.0
engine capacity) and a 2No. 4-wheel drive Toyota Prado jeeps. The vehicles shall
be brand new.
The contractor shall also provide for each Vehicle a driver on twenty-four hour basis.
Each car shall be equipped with a radio on the contractor’s frequency range. A
spare car shall be made available by the contractor if any of the vehicles has to be
repaired.
The registration with the appropriate Government Agencies and the comprehensive
insurance for the vehicles shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Also the
operating costs for the vehicles including maintenance and fuelling shall be at the
contractor’s expense. The vehicles shall be taken over by the Employer upon
completion of the works. The contractor shall paint the vehicles in the Employer’s
colours and the project title inscribed on the sides of the vehicle as approved by the
Employer, unless otherwise instructed.
The vehicles shall be reserved exclusively for the Employer’s representatives. The
vehicles shall be made available to the Employer’s Engineer two weeks after the
commencement of the contract. They shall be delivered to the Employer for
inspection to ensure that they are new before acceptance.
78
SECTION VI STANDARD FORM OF CONTRACT
CONTRACT FOR Engineering, Procurement and Construction

Contractor
between
_____________________________
[name of the Employer]
and
_____________________________
[name of the EPC Contractor]
Dated: _____________________
79
6.1 FORM OF CONTRACT

(Turn Key Award)
This CONTRACT (hereinafter called the “Contract”) is made this _________ day of the month
of______________, 20___, between, on the one hand, _____________________(hereinafter
called the “Employer”) and, on the other hand, ___________________ (hereinafter called the
“Contractor”).
[Note 1: If the Contractors consist of more than one entity, the above should be partially
amended to read as follows:
………(hereinafter called the “Employer”) and, on the other hand, a joint venture consisting of the
following entities, each of which will be jointly and severally liable to the Client for all the
Consultants’ obligations under this Contract, namely, _____________________ and
_________________________ (hereinafter called the “Contractor”).]
WHEREAS
(a) the Employer has requested the Contractor to provide certain EPC services as defined in
the General Conditions of Contract attached to this Contract (hereinafter called the
“Services”);
(b) the Contractor, having presented to the Employer that they have the required professional
skills, and personnel, financial and technical resources, have agreed to take up work on the
terms and conditions set forth in this Contract;
(c) The Employer intends to finance this contract through funds from Federal Government of
Nigeria
NOW THEREFORE the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:
1. The following documents attached hereto shall be deemed to form an integral part of this
Contract:
80
(a) The General Conditions of Contract;
(b) The Special Conditions of Contract;
(c) The following Appendices:
[Note 1: If any of these Appendices are not used, the words “Not Used” should be
inserted below next to the title of the Appendix and on the sheet attached hereto
carrying the title of that Appendix.]
Appendix A: Description of the Services Used

Appendix B: Reporting Requirement Used
Appendix C: Key Personnel and Sub-consultants Used
Appendix D: Breakdown of Contract Price in Foreign Currency Used
Appendix E Breakdown of Contract Price in Local Currency Used
Appendix F Services and Facilities Provided by the Client Used
2. The mutual rights and obligations of the Client and the Contractor shall be as set forth in
the Contract, in particular:
(a) the Contractor shall carry out the EPC Services in accordance with the provisions of
the Contract; and
(b) the Client shall make payments to the Contractor in accordance with the provisions
of the Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have caused this Contract to be signed in their
respective names as of the day and year first above written.
FOR AND ON BEHALF OF [CLIENT]
By .
Authorized Representative
FOR AND ON BEHALF OF [CONTRACTOR]

By .
Authorized Representative
[Note: If the Contractors consist of more than one entity, all these entities should appear as
signatories, e.g., in the following manner:]
FOR AND ON BEHALF OF EACH OF THE MEMBERS OF THE CONTRACTORS
[Member] [Member]
By . By
Authorized Representative Authorized Representative
81
SECTION VII TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND

SPECIFICATIONS
7.0 PREAMBLE
This section shall be read in conjuction with the accompanying three volumes of
Distribution Equipment & Material specifications (Vol 1, 2 & 3) contained in the
same CD folder.
However, wherever and whenever there is discrepancy between the specifications in

this document (Request for Proposal) and the above mentioned volumes of the
Distribution Equipment & Materials Specifications, the specifications in this document
shall prevail.
7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
7.1.1 Standards
All materials referred to in these Technical specifications shall be designed,
manufactured, packed, transported, erected and tested in accordance with the latest
publications of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)standards, British
Standards (BS), VDE/DIN standards or any other relevant international Standards,
whichever are most stringent.
If the contractor offers materials, equipment, design, or tests which conform to

standards other than IEC or BS, full details of the difference between the proposed
and the equivalent IEC, BS standard shall be submitted.
Wherever individual publications of standards are named in the specifications, this

shall be considered as a guide line but not to be deemed as complete in every
respect.
7.1.2 Climatic and environmental conditions
82
1 Maximum Ambient temperature 45 o c
2 Min. ambient temperature 10 o c
3 Mean annual max. temperature 30-33 o c
4 Mean annual minimum temperature 17-19 o c
5 Mean annual rainfall: 100-180cm
6 Annual average days of rain 60-80

7 Maximum relative humidity 96%
8 Isokeraunic level 150
9 Altitude Above 1000m
The information given in the above table relating to environmental conditions serve
only as general information. Bidders/Contractors must verify and supplement this
information by their own investigations and by other information supplied to them.
7.1.3 System Characteristics/Parameters

(i) Particulars of system
The particulars of the 33kV and 11kV systems are as follows:
0.415kV
S/N Unit 33kV System 11kV System
Details System
1 Number of phases No 3 3 3
Impedance Solidly
2 Solidly grounded
System Earthing grounded grounded
3 System Frequency Hz 50 50 50
4 Nominal system voltage kV 33 11 0.415
5 Highest system voltage kV 36 12 0.456
(ii) Insulation Levels

According to IEC 60071-1, the standard withstand voltages for the phase to earth
and phase to phase of all equipment and installations are as follows:
Rated Voltage Highest voltage Standard Short Duration Standard Lightning
for equipment power- frequency Impulse withstand voltage
withstand voltage kV
kV kV kV (peak value)
83
(r.m.s value) (r.m.s value) (r.m.s value)
33 36 70 170
11 12 28 75
(iii) Short Circuit level

The Short circuit level at the 33/11kV station shall be a minimum of 25KA (r.m.s)
but the equipment rating shall be 31.5KA. The short time duration of short circuit
current is 3sec.
(v) Auxiliary Services

Auxiliary electrical supply to the equipment will be as follows:
S/N AC DC Protection
1 Nominal Voltage 415/240, 4 wires 110V
2 Voltage variation % ±10 -20,+10
Semi-duplicate, 2x50% batteries and 2x100% charger arrangement with a float

charging voltage up to 125V shall be required for the substations.
(vi) Low voltage Equipment

The 1 (one) minute power frequency withstand voltage , phase to earth and phase to
phase for equipment with voltage up to 1000V is 2000V (r.m.s).
The 1 minute power frequency withstand voltage for printed electronic circuits is
1500V (r.m.s.)
7.1.4. Unit of Measurements

On all drawings and in all correspondences, metric units of measurement are to be
employed exclusively.
7.1.5 General Requirements for Design and Construction

In complying with the requirements of the specifications as explained, both with
84
respect to arrangement and detailed work, the design is to conform to the best
current engineering practices. Each of the several parts of the plant is to be of the
maker's standard design provided that this design is generally in accordance with
the approved specifications.
The essence of design should be simplicity and reliability in order to have long
continuous service life with high economy and low maintenance cost. Particular
attention should be paid to internal and external access in order to facilitate
inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
The design, dimensions and materials of all parts are to be such that they will not
suffer damage as a result of stresses under the most severe service conditions. Fully
detailed specifications of the several parts of the plant and equipment are to be
submitted describing particularly the materials to be used. Mechanisms are to be
constructed to avoid sticking due to rust or corrosion.
Workmanship and general finish are to be of the highest class throughout.
Some substations as indicated in the Schedules (located within large load centres)
shall be fully automated and SCADA ready. Accordingly all facilities necessary to aid
easy integration of the substation to a master control centre shall be required including
for example sufficient spare contacts (NO + NC) of the circuit breakers and relays as
well as other relevant equipment shall be provided to meet these requirements.
All similar parts of the plant are to be interchangeable. All equipment is to operate
without undue vibration and with the least possible amount of noise and is not to
cause a nuisance. All equipment is to be designed to minimize the risk of fire and
any damage which may be caused in the event of fire. The equipment is also to be
designed to prevent ingress of all vermin, accidental contact with live parts and to
minimize the ingress of dust and dirt. The use of materials which may be liable to
attack by termites or other insects is to be avoided.
In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard is to be given to the humid
tropical conditions under which the equipment is to work. The bidder shall make
himself familiar with the specific climatic conditions which are prevalent at site.
85
7.1.5.1 Bolts and Nuts

All metal parts shall be secured by means of bolts and nuts and locking washers.
The minimum diameter of bolts used for outdoor steel structures shall be at least
12mm.
For any threads used for bolts and nuts, only metric standards will be allowed.
The nuts of all bolts for attaching supports plates, brackets or angle supporting
insulators or earth wire fittings shall be locked by means of locknuts. All bolts and
screwed rods shall be galvanized, including the threads; all nuts shall be galvanized
excluding the threads which shall be oiled.
7.1.5.2 Motors
Where motors are called for in this specification, these shall be of totally enclosed fan
cooled type, suitable for continuous operation in the specified climatic conditions and
for direct on-line starting. Conductor insulation shall be non hygroscopic.
Motors shall be capable of operating continuously at rated output at any frequency

between 48 and 51 cycles per second and at a voltage within 6 percent of the
nominal value. Motors shall also be capable of operation at 75% of rated voltage for a
period of 5 minutes without overheating. The starting current at full voltage shall not
exceed six times the rated full load current.
7.1.5.3 Contactors and Starters

Contactors and starters shall conform to the relevant PHCN or IEC Standards
(whichever is more stringent). Starters shall be suitable for direct starting of motor.
All contactors and starters shall be mounted in positions easily accessible for
maintenance and inspection , be of robust design, be well ventilated and
maintenance- free operation in conditions of high relative humidity.
7.1.5.4 Castings
All castings are to be as free from blow holes, flaws and cracks as is practicable. No
welding, filling or plugging of objective parts is to be done without the sanction of the
Engineer and then only with his approval in writing.
86
All cast-iron is to be of close-grained quality and is to be corrosion-resistant. Cast-iron
is not to be used for any part of the equipment which is in tension or which is subject to
impact stresses.
7.1.5.5 Welding
The Contractor is to satisfy the Engineer that the welding is in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant standards.
The Engineer reserves the right to visit the Contractor's work at any reasonable time
during fabrication of the items of plant and to familiarize himself with the progress
made and the quality of the work to date.
Welding and tests on items of plant are to be carried out to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer. Mechanical Tests are to be carried out in the presence of the Engineer,
as required.
7.1.5.6 Insulating Solids

All insulating materials are to be suitably finished so as to prevent deterioration of
their qualities under the specified working conditions.
Ebonite, synthetic resin-bonded laminated material and bitumized asbestos cement-

bonded panels are to be of suitable quality selected from the grades or types in the
appropriate IEC Standard.
In the selection of the insulating materials the extreme tropical conditions at the sites
are to be considered. No hygroscopic material is to be used.
7.1.6 WORK MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Work progress measurement shall be carried out from time to time but with the
consent of the Engineer, and at an interval of not less than two (2) weeks.
The Contractor shall make digital colour photographic records of the progress of
work and at least three (3) prints of each photograph shall be at the disposal of the
Engineer. Polariod photographs are not acceptable. The Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer written detailed progress report covering each work measurement.
Any delay in manufacture, procurement or installation of equipment has to be
mentioned, and its influence on the completion date has to be explained in the
87
reports. Any modification of the following which must have been submitted to the
Engineer after the signing of the contract has to be attached to the report:
• General Construction Programme

• Inspection Programme
• Erection Programme
7.1.7 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit all the information with respect to the execution of works
as specified.
Before proceeding with the manufacture of equipment, the Contractor shall submit
for review, general erection drawings and complete documentation to establish
compliance with the Specification with respect to manufacture, installation, operation
and maintenance. The design calculations, design data, operation and maintenance
instructions shall also be submitted.
The Contractor is responsible for any discrepancies, errors, or omissions in the

submittals whether they have been reviewed by the Engineer or not, provided that
such discrepancies, errors, and omissions are not due to inaccurate information or
particulars furnished in writing to the Contractor by the Authority.
The Contractor shall obtain all necessary regulatory approvals, permits, registrations
and licences of designs, drawings and equipment from the appropriate authorities in
the Country of manufacture and in Nigeria and submit proof. Costs arising from
these approvals, registrations, testings and inspections, together with the provision
of inspection certificates for same shall be borne by the Contractor. He should
submit all information in the English language and is SI unit system.
7.1.7.1 Approval of Drawings:

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, four copies of all
drawings, diagrams etc, which are required to be submitted under this
contract. In the event there is discrepancy in the number of drawings to be
submitted as indicated in this section and the Price Schedule, the number in the
Price Schedule shall prevail.
88
The Engineer will either approve these documents or, if he deems
necessary, request changes or modifications to be made therein and
return one copy to the Contractor with his comments, if any, within two
weeks of their receipt by him.
The Contractor shall re-submit for final approval revised copies within one week of
the receipt of the marked-up drawings.
Approval of drawings by the Engineer, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of
any part of his responsibility to meet all of the requirements of these specifications,
or as to the correctness of his drawings.
All drawings or documents submitted to the Engineer shall bear the Contractor's
stamp of approval, the date of approval and the Contractor's signature.
7.1.7.2 Submission dates of Drawings for Approval:

The submission dates of documents for approval are:
(i) Within maximum of three weeks from the date of the Contract coming into
force.
- Equipment drawings and diagrams
- All construction drawings including Civil Work drawings, etc.
(ii)) Within maximum six weeks from the date of the contract coming into force.
- Elementary and wiring diagrams of control installation etc.
7.1.7.3 Completion Drawings and Documents:

The Contractor shall submit within a period of one month after the completion of
works, the following to the Engineer:
(i) Hard copies (Six sets) of all "as built" drawings and diagrams on A3 sized
white paper ; plus one (1) electronic copy
(ii) Hard copies (Six sets) of well bound instruction books for operation and
Maintenance on A4 sized white paper; plus one (1) electronic copy
89
7.1.7.4 Requirements for Drawings
Every drawing shall have a title block provided at the lower right-hand corner.
At least the following information shall be displayed within the title block:
- Contractor's name
- Employer's name, which is:
- Project name: Distribution Substation and Line Projects Associated with the
Niger Delta Power Plant Projects
- The Contractor's drawing number and revision index
- Brief description of contents of drawings
- First date and revision dates
- Scale and scale bar (where applicable)
The North arrow shall be indicated on all geographical layout drawings.
Letters and figures shall be clear, uniform and evenly spaced.
After commissioning of the entire plant, all drawings shall be up-dated by the
Contractor to show the "As Built" status and the drawings shall be stamped "AS
BUILT”. The Contractor shall also submit a schedule of the list of all drawings
showing the following information;
- Description of the drawing

- Contractors' drawing number, together with the latest revision index.
7.1.8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Materials used in the manufacture of the specified equipment shall be of the kind
composition, and physical properties best adapted to their various purposes in
accordance with the best engineering practice. All equipment shall conform to the
applicable standards as to material, workmanship, design and tests.
Tolerances, fits, and finishes shall conform with the best modern shop practices in
manufacture of finished products of a nature similar to these covered by the
Specification. All equipment shall be of rugged durable construction, designed for
frequent operation.
90
Where the Contractor desires to use stock material not manufactured specifically for
the works, satisfactory evidence shall be given that such material conforms to the
requirements stated in the specifications, in which case tests on these materials
may be waived.
Should any departure from a Contract Drawing occur during manufacture, the nature
of the department and the proposed method of rectification shall be reported in
writing by the Contractor to the Engineer, and the Engineer may decide whether the
item of plant concerned as rectified, is acceptable. Acceptance of rectification
method by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to
supply materials which meet the requirements of the contract.
7.1.9 PACKAGING:
The Contractor shall prepare, pack and load all materials and equipment for
shipment in such a manner that they are protected from damage during shipment,
and shall be responsible for and make good any and all damages resulting from
improper packing. Items subject to open storage for several months at site shall be
suitably protected from weather damage.
The outside of all containers, packages, etc. shall be clearly marked with the total
weight, point of maximum weight and correct position for the attachment of lifting
hooks and cables.
7.1.10 ESSENTIAL SPARE PARTS

The Bidder shall submit a list of essential spare parts for each equipment
including the corresponding prices for such item. The employer shall
decide on the items to include in the Bid Evaluation.
The Bidder shall note that the climatic conditions shall be very severe which may
cause more rapid deterioration of some parts of the equipment than usual in
supplier's countries. Spare parts shall therefore be packed separately as specified
and shall be delivered adequately and properly packed for several years' storage.
7.1.11 INTERCHANGEABILITY AND STANDARDIZATION:

The homologous pieces shall be interchangeable without needing any adjustments.
91
All equipment, parts and elements of mass production shall be standardised. These
pieces of equipment, parts and element shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:
Motors, pumps, flanges, bolts, valves, gauges and detectors, electrical instruments
and measuring devices, terminals and terminal boxes, primary, secondary and
auxiliary relays, contactors, fuses and switches, lamps, bulbs, sockets, plugs, push
buttons, etc.
7.1.12 LABEL AND PLATES:

Each equipment shall be provided with firmly fastened nameplates, indicating name
of manufacturer, type, serial number, year of fabrication, main characteristics, and
all other further information for a proper identification of the equipment. All tables,
data and name plates on equipment or panels shall be in the English Language.
7.1.13 CORROSION PROTECTION AND PAINTING:

All equipment shall be provided with a coating system. The Contractor, however
shall have the right to propose, according to his own experience, a coating system
different from that to be supplied by Engineer. This proposal shall be subject to
approval by the Engineer.
Equipment which is not specifically manufactured for this Contract may be to the
manufacture’s standard coating system, provided that the system has a total dry film
thickness of at least 0.2mm, and has been approved, and the finished colour is
acceptable.
Painting which has been damaged during transportation or storage shall be restored
adequately by the Contractor after removing entirely the cost or part of the
deteriorated cost to the complete satisfaction of the engineer. The new, dry coat
must have the stipulated thickness.
The Contractor must supply sufficient quantities of primary and finishing paint for the
purpose of retouching at site.
7.1.14 TRANSPORT AND HANDLING OF MATERIAL AT SITE, CRANE FACILITIES:
92
The Contractor shall be responsible for off-loading, safe-keeping, handling and
storage of all equipment supplied at site. The Contractor shall also provide all
necessary lifting and transport equipment for handling of all supplied material on his
storage space and from the storage space to the installation site.
If additional handling equipment is required for site installation, this shall be provided
by the Contractor.
7.1.15 INSTALLATION AND CHECKING OF WORKS:

All works on site shall be carried out in such a manner as not to obstruct the
operations of any other contractor on site or the operation of existing plant in the
station. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for discussion and approval, his
proposed erection procedures and particulars of his proposed temporary works.
As each part of the contract works is erected, it shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval. Such approvals shall in no way relieve the contractor of any of his
obligations.
7.1.16 FIRE-PROTECTION AND FIRE-FIGHTING:

The Contractor shall be responsible for the fire protection of all buildings, plant and
equipment under his care by the provision of personnel and fire fighting equipment.
7.1.17 PREPARATION FOR PUTTING INTO OPERATION:

Before the equipment is accepted by the Engineer for operational use, all circuits
shall have been subjected to insulation resistance tests, checked for continuity and
grounds, properly and accurately connected and checked for tightness, and all
blocking of instruments and mechanisms removed. All equipment shall have been
thoroughly cleaned inside and outside of all dirt, grease, grit, cable and conductor
strippings, metal filings or any other foreign matter.
All protective relay cases and associated auxiliaries shall have been thoroughly
blown-out with dry gas and checked for proper operation of all jack contacts and
shorting bars or built-in test switches and shorting bars. All identification markers
and nameplates shall have been properly and accurately installed. All high voltage
connections shall have been accurately torqued or welded, any compounds or weld
spatter removed. All porcelain insulator materials for bushings, shall have been
93
thoroughly cleaned immediately prior to energizing. All insulating oils shall have
been properly and thoroughly filtered and purified, checked for proper level, and
shall be tested for insulating quality immediately prior to energizing the equipment
with which it is used. The alignment of all working parts shall have been checked,
all adjustable devices calibrated and set at their proper operating value, all artificial
load tests completed, and any and all preliminary functional operational tests
required for satisfactory operation thoroughly completed.
7.1.18 EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT, CABLE AND CONDUCTOR DESIGNATION:

All electrical equipment furnished by the Contractor and all conduits, cables, and
conductors shall be identified as to, function or designation. All major equipment
shall be marked to show either the equipment designation number or the equipment
name and phase relation. All relays, instruments, control switches, and similar items
shall be marked to show either a device designation and function or the function and
phase relation.
Equipment, conduit, cable and conductor identification tags or identification paint

shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor, and samples of all tags and
mounting materials shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer.
7.1.19 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION OF EMPLOYER'S STAFF

During the on-site erection period of the equipment, the Employer's technical staff
shall be instructed by the Contractor and allowed to follow all the assembly
operations in co-operation with the Contractor's own technicians and erection
personnel. The same procedure shall, apply during the trial operating period.
7.1.20 CLEANING UP
Throughout the duration of the contract, the Contractor shall maintain the works
in a clean and tidy condition.
All material not in use and no longer required for the works, all condemned materials
and all rubbish, shall be removed from the site as and when required by the
Engineer. Combustible rubbish shall be removed daily and may be destroyed in an
approved fashion in an area designated by the Engineer.
7.1.21 ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING:
94
It is not intended to enumerate or describe all the works or services to be performed,
under these following clauses. The intention of the Contract is to have properly
completed substation ready for operation and the Contractor shall therefore perform
all work and services, except those specifically excluded, necessary for a complete
and proper erection and commissioning of the substation.
The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment delivered to site is complete and in
perfect order before proceeding with assembly and erection of same. All work shall
be done in a neat, precise manner according to the best practice applicable and as
approved by the engineer. The erection shall be carried out in accordance with the
time schedules.
7.1.22 SITE COMMISSIONING TESTS:

The tests required at site for the various equipment have been specified in the
relevant sections. Additional tests, if required shall be specified separately by the
Engineer within a reasonable time before commissioning of the equipment and shall
be carried out by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the engineer.
In particular, the correct deflection of meters, wherever used ,and their accuracy
shall be checked. Also measurements to check the accuracy of watthour-meters
shall be made.
All necessary instruments and test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor
and their cost shall be included in the Lump Sum Price for erection and
commissioning of the substation. All plants shall be tested and commissioned by the
contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
7.1.23 CORONA
Equipment shall be designed as to minimize corona or other electrical discharge and
radio interference.
7.1.24 INTERLOCKING FACILITIES

Isolating devices, earthing switches, etc., shall be provided with an approved
interlocking system which ensures safe operation of the equipment under all service
conditions.
95
Mechanical interlocks shall be employed where practicable and shall be effective at
the point where hand-power is applied so that stresses cannot be transferred to
parts remote from that point.
Electrical interlocks shall so work as to interrupt the operating supply, and an

approved system of interlocks shall be provided and shall include for emergency
hand operation of equipment normally power operated. Failure of supply (or its
restoration after an outage) or connections to any electrical interlocks shall not
produce or permit faulty operation.
Fit breakers with electrical interlocks to interlock the breaker with its isolating
switches so that the switches cannot be operated while the breaker is closed, and
so that the switches can only be operated from the local position when the breaker
operating position has been selected on local.
Provide an electro-mechanical interlock on isolating switches in addition to the

electrical interlocks aforementioned.
7.1.25 LOCKING FACILITIES

Locking facilities shall be provided on each item of substation equipment as detailed
below and shall be additional to the mechanical interlocking devices. Locks and
keys shall be in accordance with the requirement of this specification. Where a
mechanism is to be locked in a specific position, the locks shall be fitted to that part
of the mechanism where the operating power is applied and not to remote or
ancillary linkages.
All panel access doors shall be locked by square socket locks. Locks shall be
designed, constructed and located on the equipment so that they will remain
serviceable without operation or maintenance for continuous period of up to two
years and with suitable maintenance shall be fit for indefinite service.
7.1.26 EARTHING SYSTEM

The Contractor shall ensure that the measured earthing resistance of the substation in
not more than one ohm. After measurement, if the value is more than one ohm, the
contractor shall take every step to improve the earthing system until the desired value
is achieved.
96
The earthing conductors leading from the equipment to the earthing grid shall be of
round copper or copper band with a minimum cross section of 70mm2. The copper
band shall have a minimum thickness of 3mm. Joints or splices shall be welded.
Fasteners shall be used to fix the conductors on walls, structures, etc.
Earthing rods shall be of copper clad steel with a full diameter of 16mm and length of
1.8m. The copper shall be of the same grade as the earth wire. The rods shall consist
of a steel core with heat welded copper cover of uniform thickness.
All connectors shall accommodate 95/50mm 2 in stranded copper wire and shall be of
an approved type. All bolts shall be of bronze alloy, cold formed with rolled threads and
having a minimum diameter of 12mm. The contractor shall submit detailed drawings
showing the dimensions, material, mechanical and electrical properties of the offered
connectors. All non-current carrying conductive equipment and all grounded neutrals
shall be connected to the earth grids with 70mm2 copper mesh unless other-wise
specified.
Structural Steel shall be earthed by applying bolted connections from two different
points of the earthed grid. In case of a structure consisting of several bays, each leg
shall be earthed.
7.1.27 DRAWINGS
Drawings to be submitted with the bid shall include sufficient information to show the
earthing system which shall be furnished and the method of connection.
7.1.28 INSPECTION AND TESTS

The following inspections and tests shall be carried out:
- Check to ensure that the earthing system components meet the specified
dimensions:
97
- After completion of each earthing system, tests shall be carried out by the
Contractor to prove that the resistance of the earthing system and the voltage
gradients inside and outside the substation(s) are kept within safe limits.
7.1.27 SECURITY MEASURES

The Contractor shall implement a program for security of his personnel in
accordance to safety regulation applicable in Nigeria.
The Contractor shall designate an officer in charge of security that has the training
and the equipment to attend to emergency situation. This officer shall have the
authority to stop the work at any time, if he judges that security of personnel is
compromised or the method or equipment or machinery employed to perform the
work is not convenient, and expel any individual that does not comply with safety
rules.
7.1.28 SECURITY PLAN

Within two weeks from the contract coming into force, the Contractor shall present a
security plan for the Project Engineer’s review and acceptance. The plan shall
cover essentially the following aspects:
- name of security officer and proof of adequate training,
- safety rules for Contractor personnel and visitors,
- means for fast transportation of injured personnel,
- hygiene on site of works (Potable water supply, closets,……),
- security against environmental conditions, animals and burglars,
- security against electrical shock,
- first aid measures on site,
- accessibility to nearby hospital and clinic at any time with arrangement for
standby medical personnel,
- supply to personnel of security hats/helmets, boots and glasses by
Contractor at his own expenses.
7.1.29 PREVENTION OF ACCIDENTS

All Contractor personnel shall be properly identified to control their access to the site
of works. Unauthorized person shall be prevented from entering the premises.
Identification shall also be granted to the Engineer and his representatives for
inspection of the works.
98
As a matter of example, the following measures shall be implemented.
- there shall be at least two out of every 30 workers that is trained for first aid
and have readily available a suitable first aid kit,
- any worker responsible for maneuvering electrical equipment used for the
work shall be trained to cut power and attend to any worker that has been
electrocuted,
- equipment of 40 kg or less shall be handled by a minimum of two workers;
otherwise, crane or hoist shall be used,
- all tools shall be provided with hard wood handle with no loose part or
cutting edges,
- cutting tools shall come with proper handle length, security lock and storing
case,
- wrenches shall have a lever of convenient length to avoid the use of external
tube extension,
- handling of conductors or metallic cables close to energized lines or
substation bus shall be prohibited,
- work shall be performed by a minimum of two workers
- non-metallic ladders(made of treated wood or fibre glass) shall be preferably
used.
7.1.30 WORK IN ENERGIZED AREA

When the work involves modifying or extending an existing substation where the
workers will access energized area of the substation, the Contractor shall present to
the Engineer, a detailed work plan where the Contractor explains the method he will
use to perform each operation. The Engineer will coordinate with the substation
operator to obtain the permit for the Contractor to access the area and, when
necessary, to put the corresponding section of the substation out of service. Work
on energized part is strictly prohibited.
The Contractor will be responsible to implement safety measures for work in

energized surrounding involving use of padlocks, temporary fences, signs,
grounding tools, colored tape to limit the zone etc…..
The measures shall be agreed with the Engineer and the Operator of the substation.
99
The main aspects to be considered are:
- Procedure for applying safety rules:

o Identification of electrical zone isolating points
o Request for removing an equipment from service
o Setting equipment out of service (padlocks, signs, grounding,…..)
o Work permit
o Definition of work safe zone (Planning of safety measures, identification
of dangerous points, application of safety measures…)
o Limit of work safe zone
o Instruction to personnel
o Presence of person in charge of works
o Interrupting the work
o Test
o End of work and leaving work zone
o Take away of the protected zone
o End of work advice
- Work ruling (authorization, self protection, agreement, holding by
operator….).
- Training of personnel.
- Control of safety equipment.
7.1.31 ENGINEERING
The Contractor shall perform all engineering design and site measurement
necessary for the manufacturing, construction and installation of the facilities,
namely (not limitative and as appropriate):
- measurement of soil resistivity,
- design and calculation of the buried grounding grid (As per IEEE 80),
- detailed single line diagram and switchroom layout drawings with equipment
installation and connection drawings,
- bill of material for main equipment and miscellaneous material,
- batteries and chargers sizing calculations,
- substation service load calculations,
- equipment connection diagram with calculation of voltage drops for ac power
cables and dc supply to switching equipment,
100
- protection relays setting table, and calculations and coordination study along
with verification of burden and instrument transformers with sizing of control
cables,
- schedule of control, power and digital cables
- schedule of all inputs/outputs available for SOE, SCADA and local man-
machine interface,
- schedule of all digital and analogue inputs for fault recorder,
- programming, configuration and settings of all software activated digital
devices.
All these are subject to Engineer’s approval prior to proceed with any work. If the
Contractor wishes to start the work without the Project Engineer’s consent or
approval, the Contractor will have to perform any corrective work that may result
from Engineer’s review and will not be entitled to any claim or compensation for
such work.
7.1.32 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT

The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer a detailed electrical design
comprising:
(a) single line diagram with main apparatus characteristics;
(b) overview and side views to scale showing equipment arrangement and
dimensions, bill of material numbers (as connection details, lighting fixture,
control building outlines, fences, circulating roads, electrical clearances,
etc.;
(c) control building overview and details to scale showing equipment
arrangement and dimensions, bill of material numbers, connections details,
etc.;
(d) bill of material: a complete bill of material where identification of equipment
conforms to specified numbering system for this project.
The equipment layout shall be based on the following criteria:

(a) electrical clearances: distances between live parts and to grounded
structure shall be based on BIL, electrode configuration and environmental
conditions; distance to earth shall be sufficient to insure safety of personnel
or vehicle circulating in the substation – distance is calculated as the sum of
101
object height plus clearance established previously (refer to IEC 71 and
CIGREE Committee 23 papers);
(b) circulation within substation: layout shall allow access to all apparatus with
vehicle equipped with necessary facilities (crane …) for easy maintenance or
retrieval;
(c) expansion: design shall allow for future expansion with additional feeders
and transformers bays;
(d) personnel access to live parts: where live part of an equipment could be
accessed by personnel, a structure or a pedestal shall be provided to insure
that a minimum safety distance (based on electrical clearance) be
maintained between a person and the live parts with an arm fully extended in
any direction.
(e) short-circuit withstand: equipment and busses shall withstand the dynamic
and thermal constraints of specified short-circuit currents;
(f) busses: in addition to ampacity and short-circuit current capability, the bus
shall be designed in consideration with mechanical constraints such as,
seismic reactions, deflections and thermal expansion; connections shall be
made by using flexible braided connectors or conductors with corresponding
hardware; rigid connection to main equipment is not allowed; means shall be
provided to avoid corona discharge using adequate hardware for connection,
joints, termination shield, etc.;
(g) all connections shall be mechanical; on site welding is prohibited;
(h) lighting: the lighting fixtures shall be installed on self-standing poles and
columns of the various structures to ease circulation in the substation and
illuminate specific control cabinet areas (circuit breakers, switches,
transformers, etc.); the recommended lighting levels are as follows:
- power transformer 20 Lux (min.),

- switchroom “General” 10 Lux (min.),
- access roads 10 Lux (min.),
- with uniformity factor of 10
(i) spacing for maintenance: equipment shall be accessible for safe

maintenance.
7.1.33 GROUNDING GRID
102
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Project Engineer a detailed
grounding grid design comprising:
(a) overview of grounding grid;
(b) equipment grounding connections details;
(c) bill of material where the various items are identified;
(d) calculation brief: table of measurements on site with resistance versus
distance curves, calculation of first and second layer resistivity with curves of
resistivity as a function of distance, calculations of grid resistance, step and
touch voltages (refer to IEEE 80 design guide).
7.1.34 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Project Engineer the design of
electrical distribution as follows (non limitative):
(a) AC distribution system diagrams;
(b) DC distribution system diagrams;
(c) distribution system connection diagrams for main AC and DC distribution
panels;
(d) verification of AC load schedule and service transformer(s) power rating;
(e) verification of DC load schedule and capacity of battery(ies) and charger.
7.1.35 CONTROL AND PROTECTION

The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer a complete detailed design
of protective and control panels comprising (non limitative):
(a) single protective and metering diagram with characteristics of metering and
protective transformers, devices identification, tripping and interlocking logic;
(b) alarm diagram with alarming devices identification, annunciator windows
number, where applicable SCADA point number, combining logic for each
alarm, message to operator;
(c) panel, cabinet or junction box cabling diagram showing connection of each
cable wire to the terminal blocks or devices;
(d) listing of all available signals of programmable logic controller for SCADA
use;
(e) schematic logic diagrams of automation with programmable logic controller;
(f) listing of all data available from digital metering and protective devices
obtained from digital interface by SCADA;
(g) listing of available signals for fault recorders;
103
(h) calculation brief of all protective relays settings along with coordination
graphics.
The design shall be based on the followings (non-limitative):

(a) Redundancy of main and backup protective circuits; Contractor shall design
main and backup protective circuits to insure complete segregation from the
instrument transformers to the breaker trip coils using independent DC
supplies; distinct current transformers cores, distinct panel enclosures,
distinct cables apart from one another, etc….; common points between the
two circuits are not allowed; in case the relays need to be connected to the
same voltage transformer winding, separate feeders with mini-moulded
circuit breakers (three poles) shall be used; an alarm signal shall be
produced in case of circuit breaker opening or loss of voltage.
(b) Cabling: diagram showing connection of each cable wire to the terminal
block or device; the diagram shall be based on physical layout of the panel,
cabinet or junction box showing cable wire spread on the terminal blocks
strips; cables wires connection shall be executed in a standard consecutive
manner by increasing wire number from top to bottom; the Contractor shall
coordinate the internal wiring between devices and terminal blocks with
equipment manufacturers to insure that the cables will be connected in this
standard fashion at both ends; the diagram shall be completed with incoming
cable origin, size, number; panel wiring diagram can be used to indicate
cables connections.
(c) Normal operation of substation shall be from local man-machine interface,
from main SCADA control center; a selector switch on each substation
control panel allows to enable/disable remote SCADA operation; local
substation operation can be performed manually from the man-machine
interface or the mimic panel; operation from switchyard shall be possible by
selecting the local position of local/remote selector on switchyard equipment
panel; an alarm signal shall be produced if a selector switch allows for local
or control building operation.
(d) In case of transformer automatic on load tap changer, normal operation shall
be automatic; The manual/automatic operation shall be selectable from
control building or control centre; the operation from the switchyard shall be
possible by selecting the local/remote selector on-load tap changer panel;
the local operation shall be manual only.
104
(e) Metering and protection circuits: metering and protection circuits shall be
segregated such that instrument transformer windings can not be used
simultaneously for both application.
(f) The Contractor shall insure compatibility with the remote existing substation
line protection; the principle of existing line protection is:
- main and back-up distance protection with permissive under-reach carrier
scheme;
- main and back-up line differential protection in special application;
- weak end infeed logic with echo type carrier scheme and undervoltage
detection in remote substation (when applicable);
- the telecommunication channels are equipped with teleprotection units each
suitable for at least two signals which provides independent signals for
permissive under-reach, directional overcurrent permissive trip (1), transfer
trip (1) and weak end infeed logic; the transfer trip is used for shunt reactor
failures or line circuit breaker failure.
(g) Fault recorder system comprising a master station for the purpose of data
processing and fault analysis and remote terminal units located in various
substations.
7.1.36 CABLING
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Project Manager a detailed cabling
design comprising (non-limitative):
(a) cable routing diagrams showing path of cables from control building to
the various apparatus and between apparatus;
(b) list of cables showing cable number, origin and destination, type of cable
estimated length and nature of signals transmitted;
(c) cable bill of material: total length of cable with safety margin for each
type of cable.
The design shall be based on the followings (non-limitative):

(a) Cable circuit segregation: a single cable shall not carry signals from
redundant circuits, from AC and DC supplies at the same time, from
distinct DC supplies, with AC power purposes, with instruments
transformers current or voltage.
(b) Current transformer cables shall only carry current from this current
transformer set; the size of conductor shall be 6 mm2 Cu minimum, a
105
junction box (supported by middle phase) shall be used for line current
transformers to group the three phases; all terminals of individual cores
shall be connected to the incoming terminal strip; jumpers are used to
close the three phase circuit and link to the outgoing terminal strip which
is connected to the cable departing for control building.
(c) Voltage transformers cables shall only carry voltage from this voltage
transformers set; the size of conductor shall be 4 mm2 Cu minimum; a
junction boxes (supported by middle phase) shall be used to group the
three phases in a breaker shall be used for the incoming voltage signal
and each individual feeder departing for the control building panels.
(d) Spare wires: Contractor shall make provision for spare wires in such a
way that there is at least 10% spare wires available in the cables linking
two equipments or junction boxes.
(e) Cable laying: cables shall be laid separately by voltage level; the AC
power cables shall be located preferably at bottom level of cable
trenches and DC cables at higher level.
7.1.37 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

The conractor shall transport all equipment and materials to be supplied by the
Employer from Distribution Zonal Stores to the site.
The Contractor will advise the Engineer of the schedule of transportation and
delivery of all equipment and material that is included in his scope of supply.
7.1.38 RECEPTION OF EQUIPMENT ON SITE

The Contractor is responsible for the reception of equipment and material at site:
a) Visual inspection
o any damage to equipment packing or container shall be recorded in
detail,
o any leak of liquid or gas shall be recorded
Special attention shall be given to fragile equipment such as porcelain insulators

and control and protection panels.
b) Packing list
106
An inventory of all shipment shall be made of each single item shown on the
packing list. Any sign of packing unauthorized opening or violation shall require a
detailed inventory of the content of the packing to record any missing or stolen part.
The equipment and material packing shall not be opened until the Contractor is
ready to proceed with the installation.
Damage reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. In case that the damaged
equipment was supplied by the Employer and it is proved that the damage was not
done by the EPC contractor, the Engineer shall take necessary measures for
repairs or replacement.
Once ready for assembly and erection of equipment , a detailed inventory of each
packing will be made to ensure completeness and integrity. Care shall be taken to
avoid mixing parts from identical equipment with different serial number.
c) Log book and report

A log book shall be kept by the Contractor for all equipment and material received at
site. Log book shall include a copy of packing list and damage report.
The log book shall include all relevant inspection data such as special test made on
a transformer (Megger of core and dew point reading).
7.1.39 STORAGE AND SECURITY

The log book shall be the basis for the inventory of equipment and material stored at
site. Once the equipment and material have been received at site, the Contractor is
liable for any damage, loss or robbery of a components or a part until the provisional
take-over by the Employer. All equipment and material, that will be used inside a
building of the substation, shall be stored to prevent exposure to “outdoor” climatic
environment.
As for equipment that will be used in the switchyard, a convenient area shall be
provided where there is not water flooding and sufficient space for the lifting and
handling machinery to manoeuvre. Once the work has been completed, the
Contractor will hand over to the Engineer all remaining unused material and
equipment along with the spare parts instruments and tools included in the supply.
107
Completeness and integrity of these components will be one of the criteria to deliver
the provisional take-over certificate by the Engineer.
7.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
7.2.1 Colour Codes and Designations

The colour codes shall generally be as follows:-
7.2.2 For Phase Designation

The following designations and colours are to be used:
PHASE DESIGNATION COLOUR
1 R Red
2 Y Yellow
3 B Blue
Neutral N Black
Earth E Green/Yellow
These phase designations shall be shown in all drawings and diagrams.
7.2.3 For Wiring of Control Installations

The colour code shown in above also apply to current and voltage transformer
circuits. The colour of wire for all connections in a.c. circuits other than current and
voltage transformer circuits and connections in a.c./d.c circuit shall be black. The
colour of wire for all connections for d.c. circuits shall be grey. The wiring diagrams
must indicate wire colours. On no account shall wire colours different from above
be used without the approval of the Engineer.
7.2.4 Designation for the High Voltage Apparatus
108
Every item of high Voltage Apparatus shall be designated with a number. These
numbers are to be shown in the single line diagram and shall be used for the
designation in the diagrams, on the control switches of the apparatus, and on the
apparatus itself.
7.2.5 Auxiliary Electricity Supplies

• 415V A.C. Power System
• Type of system: 3-phase, 4-wire, 50Hz
• Nominal voltage between phases 415V
• Limits of supply voltage between which an a.c. operating device or auxiliary
equipment shall be capable of operating correctly.+ 10%/-15%
• Limits of frequency between which an a.c. operating device or auxiliary
equipment shall be capable of operating correctly.
- during normal operation +5%
- transient change +10%
o Neutral point Solidly earthed
The 3-phase supply shall be used for power circuits and the single-phase supply for
lighting, motor controls and similar small power circuits, where a.c. current is not
specified.
7.2.6 Protection of auxiliary circuits

All control and auxiliary circuits and secondary circuits of voltage transformers shall be
protected by miniature circuit breakers (m.c.b.) of adequate rating. These mcb's shall
have a normally open auxiliary contact for alarm annunciation.
7.2.7 Inspection and Tests (For Electrical Equipment)

The tests shall be carried out at the factory or in a suitable laboratory in accordance
with the approved Standard Specifications.
The tests shall comprise all tests necessary to prove the materials and equipment
comply with the Standard Specifications and with this Specification and to reveal
faults in material and construction.
Test Certificates shall show the actual results and conditions of tests performed, the
test circuits, oscilograms, etc. Four copies of all certificates shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
109
7.2.8 Acceptance Tests at the Manufacturer's Work

The acceptance tests shall be divided into type tests, routine tests and eventually,
special tests. Tests which have for the purpose of showing the characteristics of
equipment i.e the tests which are generally described in the Standard Specifications
as type tests, shall be carried out on one item of apparatus or piece of
equipment etc. of each type and rating.
If evidence is available of successfully carried out type tests on identical apparatus in a

neutral laboratory, this may be accepted in lieu of these tests, if not otherwise
specified in the Detailed Technical Specifications. These type test documents
shall be submitted within 120 days of Award of contract.
Tests which are for purpose of revealing faults in material or construction, i.e the tests
which are generally described in the Standard Specifications as routine tests, shall be
made on each piece of equipment to be supplied.
After assembly, the complete units shall as far as possible, be tested for operation
under simulated service conditions to assure the accuracy of wiring and proper
functioning of the equipment. Routine test certificates shall be submitted to the
Engineer within 60 days after tests have been successfully effected.
On arrival at site and during the course of erection, all items of equipment shall be
inspected and tested so as to ensure that there shall be no delay in commissioning
due to supply of incorrect or damaged equipment.
7.2.9 Final Commissioning and Taking Over Test At Site

After the equipment is installed and placed in satisfactory operation, the installation
shall be tested in accordance with applicable standard specifications, and according to
Detailed Technical Specifications, and with general practice obtained on the electric
supply industry to determine whether or not the Contractor's guarantees have been
fulfilled and to prove compliance with this Specification.
The Engineer shall be present at the above-mentioned tests. All necessary

instruments and equipment required for the performance of the tests shall be provided
by the Contractor.
110
At the end of the satisfactory tests of the installed equipment test certificates shall to
be issued within two weeks after taking over.
7.2.10 Defective Equipment

If, on any test specified above, the material, equipment pre-assembled unit, or parts of
the installation is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract, the
Contractor shall, with all speed, make good the defect or ensure that, the materials
equipment or installation comply with the Contract. Thereafter, if the engineer so
requires, the tests shall be repeated.
The Contractor shall bear all the expenses of tests carried out at his
subcontractor's workshop and at site.
111
7.3 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM AND

PROTECTION/RELAY FACILITIES
Substation automation shall be installed in some substations especially those

located in some big cities. The Price Schedule shall be clear on the substations
which are applicable.
7.3.1 Digital Substation Control System (DSCS)
7.3.1.1 Functionalities
The DSCS shall satisfy the following requirements:
(1) The human interface shall consist of:
- one MM1 (i.e. control screen, PC,…) dedicated for the control of the
equipment;
- one MM1 for the alarms. It must be possible to use the second MM1 for
control in case of failure of the first one.
(2) The normal control of the plant will be from the control screen, which means:
(a) opening/closing of the HV breakers and disconnecting switches;
(b) closing of the HV breakers through built-in synchronization
equipment;
(c) operation of the transformer on-load tap changers, i.e. change from
Automatic to Manual, Increase and Decrease signals;
(d) change from Local to Remote mode;
(e) position indication of all HV equipment, including the transformer tap
positions and the;
(f) measurements of the active and reactive power, current and voltage,
power factor, frequency, energy measurement must also be included;
112
(3) Software grouping of alarms (by bay, by HV equipment,…) on the control
screen must be included, so as to keep the operator permanently informed.
(4) The BCU’s (bay control units) will have the following features:
(g) they are used as a back-up control for the HV circuit-breakers and for
the transformer OLTC;
(h) A L/R (local/remote) switch is installed in the protection cabinet or will
be integrated in the BCU; it is used to select the control, either locally
(from the protection cabinet) or from the DSCS (R ); in L mode, the
control from the BCU or from the protection relay must be possible
even if the DSCS is out of service;
a. They send the control pulses to the HV equipment or to the
transformer OLTC, controlled by the DSCS;
b. They make the acquisition of the position of the HV equipment for
transmission to the DSCS; the state of the digital inputs must be
available on the relay or on the BCU front screen
c. They make the acquisition of the analogic measurements for
transmission to the DSCS; these measurements must be
available on the relay or on the BCU front screen.
7.3.1.2 Equipment
The DSCS basically consists of:
o A local high speed data transmission network, via optical fibres
o Several bay control units (BCU) for the acquisition of the analogic, digital and
alarm signals
o One (1) bay control unit for the general alarms of the 33kV equipment
o One (1) bay control unit for the general alarms of the 11kV equipment
o One (1) HMI (Human – Machine interface) unit for the control of the 33kV
system (synoptic diagram, measurements …..)
o One (1) HMI unit for the control of the 11kV system (synoptic diagram,
measurements …..)
o One (1) HMI unit for management of the alarms (can also be used as a back-up
for control of the 33kV system
o One (1) HMI unit for management of the alarms (can also be used as a back-up
for control of the 11kV system
o One (1) printer (data logger)
o One (1) gateway unit for SCADA
113
o All software for normal operation of the system, and for loading of the data bank.
o Complete computer hardware/all peripherals with the latest technology. The
computer monitor screen shall not be less than 27” size.
o UPS (uninterruptible power supply) of minimum autonomy time of 4 hours
including a spare UPS. The facility to switch over to the spare UPS if the main
UPS is faulty shall be provided.
The Contractor has the opportunity to combine the BCU with a protection relay
(overcurrent relay) provided that all requirements and functionalities are satisfied.
7.3.2 Control and Protection
7.3.2.1General
Generally, all relays and meters shall be of the digital type.
The On Load Tap Changer of the power transformers shall have indoor control
and relay panels mounted in the control room.
The Control facilities for the indoor switchgear units shall include the control
switches of circuit breakers and disconnectors, the mimic diagram, indicating
lights, instruments, recorders, alarm annunciators bells, hooters, as well as
associated relays, wiring and terminal blocks, for reliable and efficient
operation of the controlled equipment..
Each indoor switchgear unit shall be complete with protection relays, including
all auxiliary relays and equipment, wiring and terminal blocks, necessary to
constitute complete units ready for operation. Test sockets are provided for
testing the relays.
Protective relays shall be fully integrated into the existing protection scheme of
the substation, where applicable particularly regarding the automatic reclosing
schemes, the busbar protection, synchrocheck, etc.
The overcurrent relays shall be of the universal type, which means that any
standards IEC operating curves must be selectable, including the constant
time.
114
Independent trip time must be available for each sensing unit.
Transformer auxiliary panels for the 33/11kV power transformers contain tap
position indicator, winding temperature indicator, raise-lower tap-changer
switch with tap-changer-in progress indicator, switches for parallel operation of
tap-changer, all equipment and devices for automatic voltage regulation, and
all the necessary auxiliary equipment, associated protection relays,
instruments, wiring and terminal blocks.
For the rehabilitation works shall include a digital substation control system, a
Bay control unit (BCU) shall be provided to include the interfacing equipment
for the substation control system, connected via optical fibre links.
The BCU will integrate two communication protocols:
- a fully open protocol to communicate with a concentrator, i.e. suitable for

control & signaling of HV equipment, alarms, measurements and back-up
control of the circuit breaker from the front panel of the relay
- the protocol shall be as per IEC standards
7.3.2.2 Standards and Recommendations

Unless otherwise specified in this Chapter, the control and relay facilities, as
as the transformer auxiliary panels, and the associated equipment shall be
designed, manufactured, erected and tested in accordance with the latest
issues of the applicable EIE, VDE and DIN standards
7.3.2.3 Design and Construction Requirements
a Panel Construction
Cubicles where applicable shall be constructed of 2mm sheet stele with edges
formed into a rectangular pattern or welded to steel shapes so that each
section is rigid and self supporting and enclosed.
All interior and exterior surfaces shall be cleaned of rust and scale before
application of a rust inhibiting primary coat of paint. Several coats of quick-
drying lacquer or paint of a colour to be approved shall then be applied.
115
Control switchboards shall be assembled from individual panels and be such

that wiring and equipment for each main circuit is clearly separated from the
others.
Protection panels shall be equipped with front and rear doors. Cabinets with
swinging panels will be used only if installation against a wall cannot be
avoided.
All panels and sections of panels shall be clearly labeled from the front and
from the rear.
Rear-mounted auxiliary relays shall be mounted as to allow free access to

wiring and panel mounted equipment. Close fitting lockable and lift-off steel
doors, allowing opening through 180o shall be provided.
Sensitive relay equipment shall not be mounted on swinging panels or doors.

The interior of each panel shall be finished with a matt surface. An interior
lamp, suitable for 240V AC and controlled by a door operated switch shall be
fitted at the top of each section.
Panels shall be well ventilated and fitted with anti-condensation heaters

controlled by thermostat.
Wiring between and within devices and terminal blocks shall be carried in
troughs or in neatly formed packs which shall be suitably secured to prevent
excessive stress on equipment or connections. Special care shall be taken
with connections between hinged or removable portions. Except for
connection to annunciator relays, the minimum wiring permissible will be
2.5mm2. All wiring terminals shall be clearly and permanently identified by
numbered ferrules. Trip wires shall be distinctively coloured and marked
“Trip”.
No wires shall be tied or jointed between terminal points. Bus wiring
between panels shall be fully insulated and completely segregated from the
main panel wiring.
116
7.3.2.4 Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall be mounted approximately 30 cm from the bases of the

panels. The AC, DC current and potential transformer inputs shall be
separately grouped, the 415/240 V supply terminals being suitably protected.
Each wire shall be connected to an individual terminal which shall have a
clearly lettered marking strip corresponding to the wiring diagram. To allow for
extensions and alternation approximately 25% extra terminals should be
provided per terminal block.
7.3.2.5 LV Supply and Earthing

For each set of panels a double pole fuse switch of 15 amp rating for use on
240V AC shall be install in the control board.
Each relay, control and auxiliary panel shall be provided with a copper earthing
bar of 95mm2 cross section and arranged so that the bars of adjacent panels
can be joined and connected to the existing common bus.
7.3.2.6 Mimic Bus

The mimic bus shall show schematically the connections of equipment. The
colours shall be as follows:
33 kV - Green
11 kV - Red
0.415 kV - Yellow
7.3.2.7 Control Schemes

The control schemes shall consist of the manually operated switches for
operation of the main circuit breakers and power operated isolators from the
control panel, the indication of the operational status of breakers and isolators,
the audible and visual alarms and indications for mal-operation and actuation of
all equipment, and the metering equipment.
The operation and position indication of circuit breakers and isolators, where
applicable, shall be through discrepancy type control switches. The position of
hand operated isolators and earthing switches shall also be indicated in the
117
control room by manually cancelled discrepancy indicator switches. The
discrepancy signal shall be of the flickering type.
The discrepancy type control and indicator switches shall be mounted integral
with the mimic diagram, the positions being indicated by alignment or 90o non-
alignment with the mimic bus diagram. Location of the switches in either
position shall be positive.
Switching shall be effected by two separate motions of the discrepancy switch,

one for selection and one for operation. To cause operation, the discrepancy
control switch shall first be turned into the selected position, causing no audible
alarm but giving a discrepancy light. On pressing the knob and further turning of
the switch in the indicated direction, operation of the main equipment shall be
effected and the discrepancy light extinguished. It shall always be possible to
check the positions by turning the control switch through 90o.
When a circuit breaker, isolator or earthing switch changes position due to local
operation or tripping, the lamp shall light and the alarm indicator shall come on.
All controls shall be operated at the relevant station battery voltage. Signals for
the position indication of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing switches shall
be separately fed from the individual terminal blocks.
7.3.2.8 Alarm and Indication Schemes
Common audible alarms shall be provided for alarm signals. Trip function shall
operate a horn or siren, and non-trip functions shall operate a bell of buzzer. All
audible alarms shall be designed for central acceptance and shall allow repeated
enerigizing of the alarm between silencing and clearance of another alarm circuit.
A common facia indication panel for each circuit, shall be provided and mounted
on the associated control panel, where applicable. The units shall be of mutli-
window type (preferable with individually replaceable windows), alarms being
indicated by illumination of inscribed transparent windows.
7.3.3 PROTECTION SCHEMES

7.3.3.1 General
The protection schemes shall ensure clear discrimination between faulty and
118
healthy circuits and shall remain inoperative during transient surges due to
switching or due to faults outside the protected zone.
The protection schemes shall be reliable, maintenance free, suitable for tropical
conditions and be complete with relays, auxiliary relays, associated resistors,
capacitors, reactors, fuses, terminal blocks, wiring, etc. All equipment shall be
mounted on panels (see section E.11.3.1 here above).
7.3.3.2 Distance protection

Distance relays shall have at least three directional steps. Starting elements will
be of the under-impedance type. Measuring elements will be of the MHO or of the
polygonal characteristic.
The distance relays will also include:

- input/output signals for autoreclosing,
- SOFT feature (fast clearing of fault in case of switching onto a fault),
- Power swing blocking,
- interfacing for all standard telecommunication schemes (POTT, etc.),
Breaker-failure detector with associated timers
7.3.3.3 Automatic reclosing

The AR equipment shall allow three-phase trip and reclosing for all other types of
faults. Three-phase AR must be independently selectable (ON-OFF), from the
protection cabinet or from remote.
Three-phase AR will be performed through synchronizing check, including dead

bus/dead line facilities (with any type of combination).
For single and double busbar substation schemes, the AR function may be
integrated in the distance relay.
7.3.3.4 Overcurrent and earth fault protection

The back-up overcurrent and ground fault protection will be non directional for
phases and earth, plus one directional unit for earth faults.
7.3.4 BAY CONTROL UNIT (BCU)
119
The BCU is connected to the metering CT’s and to the line VT’s. The
communication with the digital substation control system (DSCS) is ensured by
optical fibre links.
The BCU provides the following facilities:
- measurement and indications (MW, Mvar, Amps, Volts,………),
- input signals for signaling and alarms,
- output signals to control the HV equipment, autorecloser, OLTC etc.
In case of disturbance of the DSCS it must be possible to keep the full control of
the equipment of the bay (control of equipment, signaling, alarms and
measurements).
The BCU shall be available for both the 33kV and 11kV.
7.3.4.1 Miscellaneous equipment

Master trip relays, trip supervision relay, other auxiliary relays, etc.
7.3.4.2 Transformer protection

This section applies to the 33kV side of the 33/11kV Transformers. According to
the substation, the cabinet may contain or not the protection and control
equipment for the 33kV or 11kV side of the unit.
The cabinet contains all equipment required for the protection and control of the
transformer, including the facilities for OLTC (on-load tap changer).
7.3.4.3 Transformer differential protection

The differential relay will be of the bias type. The relay contains also:
- a built-in restricted earth-fault protection for the 11kV winding,
7.3.4.4 Transformer restricted earth fault protection (11kV side)

The relay covers the 11kV windings. It may be of the high impedance or of the
low impedance type (bias).
120
7.3.4.5 Auxiliary relays for transformer mechanical protection
All interfacing/tripping relays for the transformer mechanical protection

(Buchholz, overpressure, oil level indicators, etc.) are included in the cabinet,
and will be used for duplication of information, distribution of tripping signals,
alarms, etc.
7.3.4.6 Overcurrent, earth fault and stand-by earth fault protection(11kV)

The back-up overcurrent and ground fault protection will be non directional for
phases and earth. The protection shall also include breaker failure detectors,
with associated timers.
The stand-by earth fault relay 51G will have two operation levels. It will be
connected to the CT’s on the ground connection of the 33kV earthing
transformer.
7.3.4.7 Overcurrent and earth fault protection at the 33kV side

The overcurrent and ground fault at the primary side will non directional for
phases and earth. The protection shall also include a breaker failure
detector , with associated timer.
Digital Energy meters at both 33kV and 11kV feeders shall be provided
where required.
7.3.4.8 Automatic Voltage Regulation

Suitable for full remote control of the transformer OLTC i.e.
- automatic – manula selection (from the cabinet or remote)
- manual operation (from the cabinet or remote)
- transformer ap indication (on cabinent and in the DSCS)
7.3.5 AC DISTRIBUTION SUPPLY

7.3.5.1 General
This chapter describes the general design and requirements of the station supply
system which comprises the following:
121
1. 200kVA, 33/0.415kV transformer with associated 33kV

switchgear, etc.; for the station auxillary supply.,
2. 0.415kV circuit breakers;
3. 27kVA stand-by diesel generator;
4. 0.415kV cables;
5. Ventilators; air-conditioners, outdoor/indoor lighting
6. AC-board with all equipment devices, cables and connections
The equipment shall be manufactured, installed and tested according to relevant

specifications and standards. The LV auxiliary voltage will be 415V, 50Hz 3-phase,
neutral (N) protection earth (PE), neutral effectively earthed.
7.3.5.2 Tests
Routine and type tests shall be made and the results issued in tests reports. A type
test certificate shall be accepted in lieu of the test.
7.3.5.3 AC Distribution Panel

The AC (L.V.) distribution panels shall be of the air insulated plastic moulded, wall
mounted type with transparent covers.
All cables shall be fed in from bottom. The panel shall be equipped with all
necessary breakers, contractors and fuses, for the station equipment.
Incoming feeders from the local supply transformers shall be equipped with an
adequate circuit breaker with thermal and overload and short circuit release.
Paralleling facilities to enable the connection of the two incomers to the LV board
shall be provided in this contract.
Ten percent spare circuits shall be provided for circuits up to 63A 1-phase and 3-
phase.
Spares for circuits of more than 63A shall be provided (2 pieces of each type).
Pilot lamps are necessary for the feeder circuit breakers ("switch closed",
"transformer switched off").
122
The 3-phase single busbar and one neutral busbar shall have a busbar rating of not
less than 400 amps. The busbars shall be of high conductivity copper and shall be
covered by suitable insulation.
The busbar shall be suitably rated for a short circuit rupturing current not less than
30kA. The interrupting current of the circuit breakers and fuses shall be not less
than 20kA .
Adequate short circuit limit devices shall be provided for automatic, miniature
current circuit breakers.
Measuring instruments shall be provided for incoming feeder current and busbar
voltage.
7.3.5.4 Wiring and Installation

The main cables between transformer and distribution panel shall be of 4-core type.
All other circuit cables and lines shall have an additional protection busbar in the
distribution panel. All wiring shall be concealed and all outlets shall be flush-
mounted.
Switchyard installation shall be weather-proof and controlled by a photo-sensitive

switch.
For each circuit it is permissible to connect no more than
a) 16 fluorescent lamps 40 W or
b) 10 bulb lamps 100 W or
c) Outlets single-phase or
d) 3 power outlets up to 15 A or
e) 2 power outlets up to 30 A (switchyard) or
f) 1 air-conditioner
7.3.5.5 Air-conditioning
Each station building shall be fitted with number of air-conditioner units as indicated
123
in the Price Schedule. The rated voltage shall be 240VAC.
7.3.5.6 Fan for Battery Room

The battery room shall be fitted with one explosion proof fan including the
necessary pipe system. The location of the forced air installation has to be
opposite the entrance door to the battery room.
The forced air circulation system has to be designed in accordance with the
requirements of good Engineering practice. Standards used will be subject to the
approval of the engineer.
The intake of the gas in the battery room shall be near the floor and in the upper part of
the room and should be expelled over the roof of the building.
7.3.5.7 Stand-by Diesel Generator Set

The stand-by generator shall have a continuous power rating of 27KVA and provide a
415kV three-phase supply. The generator shall also be sound proof. The following
data shall appear on the engine and the alternator respectively.
a) Engine nameplate
1) manufacturer's name
2) type
3) serial number
4) BHP
5) no. of cylinders
6) type of cooling
7) fuel consumption (litre/hour)
8) dimensions
9) weight
b) Alternator nameplate
1) manufacturer's name
2) type
3) serial number
4) rated kVA
124
5) rated kV
6) rated current/phase
7) rated voltage
A suitable manually operated change-over system shall be used to connect the stand-
by generator to essential preselect LV a.c supply system in case of emergency.
A list of recommended spare parts for three year's use with corresponding prices
should submitted with the Bid.
7.3.6 D.C. STATION SUPPLY

7.3.6.1 General
This chapter describes the general design and requirements of the D.C. station supply,
which comprises the station battery, the battery charger, the D.C. distribution panel
board, the emergency supply panel and the emergency lighting. All associated wiring
and circuits to the equipment shall be included in the D.C. supply system.
7.3.6.2 Battery
Required Main Data
Battery voltage 110 V
Minimum battery capacity 150 AH
The batteries shall be of the stationary lead/acid type and shall preferably be equipped
with positive tubular plates.
The complete batteries shall include the cells, inter-cell connectors, terminal lugs,
racks, cell numbers etc.
The cell containers shall be heat-resistant, shock absorbing and entirely closed, and
shall be of hard rubber or preferably of transparent plastic. Ample electrolyte shall be
provided to prevent watering for long intervals. Each cell container, if not clear enough
for the electrolyte level to be seen through it, shall be equipped with an electrolyte level
indicator.
125
Batteries shall be placed on floor mounted, sturdy wooden racks or on a plastic-coated
steel rack, suitable for easy maintenance. The surface finish of the wooden racks, if
used, shall be two coats of acid-resisting paint.
All necessary tools, thermometers, cell testers, hydrometers or other equipment

required for maintenance of the battery shall be provided. The batteries shall be fully
charged at the factory for transportation, they shall be emptied and delivered in dry
condition.
7.3.6.3 Particulars of the batteries

(a) The batteries shall have an adequate capacity to supply power to steady
state leads for ten (10) hours and to emergency lighting for at least six (6)
hours. At the end of the 6 hours, the voltage shall not have fallen under 95% of
the rated voltage.
(b) The discharge capacity shall be so determined that at the end of the
discharge period of the 10 hours the voltage is not less than that nominal
discharge voltage.
7.3.6.4 Connection in Battery Room

All connections inside the battery room, except inter-cell connection, shall be made
with copper rod supported on insulators of approved type. The copper rod, as well as
the cable connections, shall be protected from corrosion by painting with two coats of
anti-sulphuric enamel or other approved means.
Intercell connections shall be of low resistance and shall be in a clean condition

when bolted and shall be protected by petroleum jelly. Alternatively, intercell
connections may be soldered.
7.3.6.5 Battery Charger

Required Main data
Rated input voltage (a.c.). 240V
Rated frequency 50 Hz
Rated output (d.c.) 110V, 25A
Setting range of output voltage + 10%
Output voltage variation (for
126
0 to 100% output current and
+ 10% - 15% input voltage
variation) 1 + 1%
- with battery in parallel: 3%
- without battery in parallel: 5%
Charging characteristics: IU according toIEC and DIN 41773
The battery charger shall be designed to operate with the battery and shall be of
sufficient capacity. It shall be automatic type with manual control for equalizing
charge. It should be without fans or moving parts and should be capable of
charging a completely discharged battery to full charge in a maximum of ten hours
while simultaneously supplying the station demand.
The charger shall be of the self adjusting type which will automatically adjust the
charging rate from 0.1A to full charger capacity to maintain desired battery cell
voltage. The transformer shall be provided with taps to maintain desired output
voltage with plus or minus 10 percent variations in nominal input voltage.
At any tap setting, the voltage regulator shall regulate the voltage within plus and
minus 1 percent of the regulator setting with an A.C. supply voltage variation as
stated in the required main data.
An externally operated device shall be furnished for adjusting the charging voltage.
The rectifiers of the charger shall be the full wave metallic type without vacuum tube
control devices in the control or regulating circuits. Adequate automatic protection
against over-loading shall be provided. An alarm shall be provided to operate upon
failure of charging current whether it is due to A.C. line failure, internal charger failure
or any other circumstances which causes the output voltage of the charger to
fail below the battery voltage. The charger shall be enclosed in an adequately
ventilated, free standing, metal cabinet arranged for
easy access to internal equipment.
A volt-meter and an ammeter with a scale length of at least 75mm shall be

provided on the load side and a volt meter and 3-way switch on the line side. All
instruments shall be 1.5 percent accuracy class.
The high voltage, low voltage and loss of main alarms of the charger shall be
127
transmitted to the associated annunciator in the control room.
The chargers shall be fed from A.C. distribution panels. Double wound (isolating
transformers) shall be provided at the input side of the chargers to prevent galvanic
connection between the D.C. and A.C. systems.
The fan of the battery room shall be automatically controlled by the charger.
Auxiliary contacts shall be foreseen.
7.3.6.6 Low Voltage Power and Control Cables

The cables shall be PVC insulated, wire armoured, PVC sheathed (PVC/SWA/PVC)
and approved voltage grade of 1KV. The cables shall be manufactured and tested
according to regulations, respective IEC Publications. The maximal load factor shall
be 0.7. The power cables shall be multicore type with maximum 4 cores with minimum
cross-section of 2.5mm2. Control cables shall have a voltage rating of at least 600V.
Communication cables and cables for disturbance recorder shall have a d.c. rating of
at least 140V.
All cores with cross-sections larger than 2.5mm2 shall be stranded. For core cross
sections of 50mm2 or larger, single-core cables shall be used. Reduced conductor
size for the neutral will not be allowed. Each conductor shall be terminated at each
end on a stud type of unit construction, ASEA type. The terminal block shall be
suitable for accepting minimum cable sizes of 2.5mm2 - 10mm2. Unarmored cable
types may be allowed indoors provided adequate measures are made to make them
vermin proof. Such measures shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Control cables shall be of multi-core type having 4, 7, 12 or 19 cores. The minimum

size shall be 2.5mm2. The cross-section of the conductor for current transformer circuit
shall be not less than 4mm2. All control and measuring cables shall have at least 20%
spare cores.
The conductor screen shall be of semi-conductive extruded, cross-linked material. The

insulator shall be of cross-linked polyethylene, melted together with the conductor
screen. The insulator shield shall be of semi-conductive, extruded material or graphite
layer with an outer screen of semi-conductive type. The metallic screen shall be of
128
copper wire and the helix shall consist of copper tape. The outer sheath shall be of
PVC extruded.
7.4 33KV AND 11KV LINES
7.4.1 LINE SURVEY:

Preliminary survey of the 33kV and 11kV lines to be constructed have been carried out by
the Employer and the drawings based on this preliminary survey are part of this bid
document. As part of this contract, the EPC contractor shall carry out detailed survey of all
such 33kV and 11kV lines using the expertise of professional surveyors. This survey
component is included in the Price Scdeules and the EPC contractor is expected to bid for
the survey work. The EPC contractor shall submit the particulars of surveyor to be used for
the assignment for approval by the Employer.
The successful bidder shall as part of his first assignment carry out this survey work in
order to authenticate the route length of each line as earlier determined by the preliminary
survey. The survey drawings shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.
7.4.2 FABRICATION
7.4.2.1 General
High tensile steel capable of withstanding the calculated tension/stress shall be used for
the steel tubular poles and steel tension towers. The steel shall be free from, blisters,
scales, laminations, grease and other defects and suitable, in all respects, for fabrication
and hot-dip galvanizing.
A comprehensive technical data on the grade of steel shall be provided. A description of

the manufacture processes shall also be provided. Generally these shall be in accordance
with relevant IEC, BS standards.
129
All members of prefabricated frames of super steel structure shall be carefully cut and
holes accurately drilled and located such that when members are in position, the relevant
holes will march each other. All equal members shall be interchangeable.
7.4.2.2 Marking
Steel members shall be marked distinctively with erection marks. Marks shall be clearly
visible after galvanizing and correspond to those on the erection drawings. Steel stamping
shall be performed with 16 mm high characters dies. Special care shall be taken to avoid
damaging the galvanize coating, to impair member strength or to expose the marks to
obliteration during transit.
7.4.2.3 Drilling and Punching

Drilled or punched holes are acceptable for material up to 13 mm thickness. Material over
13 mm thickness shall be drilled or sub-punched and reamed. All burrs left by the drill or
punch shall be completely removed. The punch diameter shall be at least 1.6 mm smaller
than the finished hole. Punching of holes is not permitted when the thickness of the
material exceeds the finished diameter of the hole. Finished holes shall be clean and free
from burrs.
The distance between centerline of holes located at the ends of a member shall not vary by
more that 1.5 from the specified value.
Holes diameter shall be made in gauge dimensions on steel members for the thickness of
subsequent galvanizing and the possible formation of spelter fillets inside the angles so as
to allow adequate erection clearance after galvanizing.
Holes shall be accurately placed so that, no “drifting” shall be necessary at site to facilitate
assembly.
7.4.2.4 Welding
Welding of steel shall be carried out before galvanizing in accordance with relevant DIN
and/or international standards. No welding shall be allowed for parts subjected to tension.
The contractor is to satisfy the Engineer that the welding is in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant DIN.
7.4.2.5 Bending
130
All bending of pieces should be done cold. However, hot bending where advisable shall be
specified on the drawings. Bending shall be done in such a manner that full section shall
be maintained and that the physical properties of steel will not be impaired Agreement of
Purchaser shall be obtained for any bending by cutting and welding.
7.4.2.6 Fabrication Details

All necessary attachment holes and brackets for mounting equipment and operating
mechanisms, grounding wire, line conductors and overhead shield wires shall be included.
7.4.2.7 Minimum Thickness of Material

Minimum thickness, before galvanizing of main structural legs and girder chords shall not
be less than five millimeters (5mm) and all other members not les than three millimeters (3
mm). The width to thickness ratio, “b/t”, of any angle leg shall in no case exceed twenty to
one (20.1) in which “b” is the longest leg measured from the end of the root fillet to the
extreme fibre and “t” is the nominal leg thickness.
7.4.2.8 Splices and Bolted Connections

All field connections shall be bolted. Bolts shank shall extend completely through
connected members.
Bolt shall extend by at least two threads from the nut. All bolts shall come with a “grower”
type spring washer.
The main members’ splices and connections shall not be aligned vertically or horizontally.
Spacing between the connections shall be at least1800 mm.
The spacing between two bolts shall be of twice the diameter plus 10 mm.
The diagonal members connections shall be made in such a way to avoid eccentricity.
Where angles are lap spliced, the heel of the inside angle shall be in such a way as to
avoid eccentricity.
7.4.2.9 Anti-vandalisation bolts/nuts

All bolts and nuts which shall be used to join tower members shall have anti-
vandalization capability.
131
7.4.3 EQUIPOTENTIAL RINGS
Equipotential grading rings shall be provided and installed by the Contractor on all live parts
and wherever in the opinion of the Engineer, such rings are necessary to reduce the
dielectric stress on the live surfaces in order to obviate radio interference or corona effect.
The shape and finish of such rings shall be such that the external live surface of the
associated equipment is entirely surrounded and that the form of the dielectric field in the
immediate vicinity of the live rings is smooth enough to reduce the voltage gradient within
safe limits even under the most severe conditions of operating and climate conditions.
The rings shall be constituted by aluminum alloy pipes of adequate diameter. They shall be
as light as possible and present the minimum possible moment of inertia.
Provisions shall be made in order:
(a) To prevent ingress and accumulation of moisture and impurities inside the
ring.
(b) To fasten the ring to the associated equipment, in such a way as to
prevent loosening under any circumstances.
(c) To avoid vibrations or reasonable effects during operation.
The design of the ring assembles shall permit their easy partial or total installation,
dismantling and replacement, without disturbing the associated equipment. Within the
limits of an effective design, the types of rings shall be standardized as much as possible.
7.4.4 STEEL TUBULAR POLES

The steel tubular pole arrangement shall be used at the intermediate points for all
segments that have DC (Double Circuit) configuration. The poles shall be of hot dipped
galvanized steel structure and 15metres high above the ground and a total length of
17.35m. A typical sketch of the steel tubular pole complete with the cross arms for the DC
configuration is attached in this bid document.
The design of the line shall assume a maximum span of 120m between steel tubular poles
and sectionalized after every a maximum of every ten-spans. The section points shall made
of steel tension towers. All erected steel tubular poles shall be adequately earthed. The
132
points of earthing connection shall be accessible for inspection. The resistance of such
earthing connections shall not be more than 1 ohm.
7.4.5 STEEL TENSION TOWERS

All tensions including terminal points on the DC sections of the line shall have steel towers
capable of withstanding all tensions at such points. A typical sketch of the steel tension
tower complete with the cross arms for the DC configuration is attached in this bid
document.
Tension steel towers shall be made of galvanized steel trusses. The tower members shall
be bolted together using vandal-proof bolts and nuts.
All erected steel tension towers shall be adequately earthed at two legs which are
diagonally opposite. The points of earthing connection shall be accessible for inspection.
The resistance of such earthing connections shall not be more than 1 ohm.
7.4.6 REINFORCED CONCRETE POLES
Single circuit arrangement:

Reinforced concrete poles shall be used for the portions of the line which have SC (single
circuit) configuration. A typical sketch of the reinforced concrete pole complete with the
cross arms for the SC configuration is attached in this bid document. The cross arm shall
be of fibre glass material or galvanised angle iron. Under no circumstance shall wooden
cross-arm be used for this project since it is susceptible to damage while in circuit.
The design of the line shall assume a maximum span of 50m between concrete poles and
sectionalized after every a maximum of every ten-spans. The section points shall made of
H – Pole arrangement.
All erected H-Poles shall have the channel iron members adequately earthed. The points of
earthing connection shall be accessible for inspection. The resistance of such earthing
connections shall not be more than 1 ohm.
The concrete pole shall be pre-stressed during manufacture and shall be 10.36m minimum in
height. The manufacturing process of the concrete poles shall be approved by the Engineer
and tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
133
Double circuit arrangement:

Reinforced concrete poles shall also be used for the construction of DC (double circuit)
configuration. A typical sketch of the reinforced concrete pole (H-pole arrangement)
complete with the galvanised iron cross arms for the DC configuration is attached in this bid
document.
The design of the line shall assume a maximum span of 50m between concrete poles and
sectionalized after every a maximum of every ten-spans.
All erected H-Poles shall have the channel iron members adequately earthed. The points of
earthing connection shall be accessible for inspection. The resistance of such earthing
connections shall not be more than 1 ohm.
The concrete pole shall be pre-stressed during manufacture and shall be 12m minimum in
height and shall have a rectangular or square cross-section. The manufacturing process of
the concrete poles shall be approved by the Engineer and tests shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
7.4.7 OVERHEAD PHASE CONDUCTORS

The lines shall be Double Circuit overhead line for a particular segment and Single
Circuit overhead line for other designated segment. The contract includes the supply
and installation of all overhead line conductors, whether or not they are listed in the
schedule, required for the satisfactory operation of the plant being provided under this
contract.
7.4.7.1 Overhead Phase Conductor for DC Portion

The overhead phase conductors on the double circuit steel tubular poles shall be
250mm2 ACSR (Aluminum Conductor Steel reinforced) “BEAR”.
For reinforced concrete pole Double circuit arrangement, the overhead phase
conductors shall be 150mm2 AAC(All Aluminum Conductor), 3.25 x 19 cores.
7.4.7.2 Overhead Phase Conductor for SC Portion

The overhead phase conductors on the single circuit concrete poles shall be
150mm2 AAC(All Aluminum Conductor), 3.25 x 19 cores.
134
7.4.7.3 Overhead Skywire

Steel stranded galvanized sky-wire (7/3.25/1150) shall be fitted on the Double
Circuit portion of the line. Sky-wires are to be made continuous at each suspension
and tension tower by jumpers or other approved means. At each tower position the
earthwire is to be bonded to the steelworks.
7.4.7.4 Joints
Joints for connecting line conductors shall be of approved types. Tension joints for
ACRS conductor shall be of the compression type. The design of the joint shall be
such as to make it impossible to position the steel sleeve incorrectly. The electrical
conductivity and current carrying capacity of each joint under the test conditions
shall not be less than those of the line conductors.
Above shall also apply to the skywire.
7.4.8 VIBRATION DAMPERS

All ACSR line conductors shall be fitted with approved vibration dampers. An adequate
clamping surface with radius at the clamp mouth shall be provided. All bolts shall be locked
in an approved manner.
The Contractor shall provide suitable evidence of satisfactory service performance of the
dampers to be supplied. Shall be test results for fatigue an damping performance.
The earth conductors shall be fitted with be approved vibration dampers.
7.4.9 SPAN LENGTHS

The expression “span length” shall mean the horizontal distance between the centre lines
of adjacent towers or poles (for single circuit configuration).,
7.4.10 NTI-CLIMING GUARDS

Each tower shall be fitted with an anti-climbing guard of the spiked type fixed at a height of
approximately 2 metres above ground.
7.4.11 WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES
135
Danger Plates; Conspicuous “DANGER” plates each of approved design shall be
provided and fixed at all towers and poles.
Route and Tower Number: Plates indicating the route and tower numbers are to be
attached centrally on the tower and immediately below the “DANGER” plate.
7.4.12 UNDERGROUND CABLE (POWER CABLES)

7.4.12.1 General
The contract includes the supply and installation of all power and control cabling,
together with lighting and small power fittings and connections, whether or not they are
listed in the schedules, required for the satisfactory operation of the plant being provided
under this contract. Cables shall be supplied and erected along with all cable-end-
boxes, cable racking and support to the approval of the Engineer. All cables shall be
adequate for the electrical and physical requirements of use as power, lighting and/or
control cables. The cable shall be manufactured and tested according to relevant IEC
The cables shall be suitable for operation at maximum conductor temperature of 70 oC.
The conductors of the 33kV cable and all other cables shall have copper wire
conductors. The sizes up to 16mm2 may be solid, all other sizes will be stranded.
The Contractor shall be required to prepare cabling lists, schematic diagrams, and
schedules for those cables to be provided under this contract, based on general
arrangements of cable runs provided by the Engineer. The lists, diagrams and
schedules are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor is responsible for preparing detailed cable layout drawings and details on
supports and racking to the approval of the Engineer before the commencement of work.
The Contractor shall also provide final record drawings of all cable works as laid.
The power cables shall be cross-linked, polyethylene cables and shall be of single-core type.
The maximal load factor at rated current shall be 0.8. The cables shall be capable of
operating at a maximum conductor temperature of 70 oC.
7.4.12.2 Required Main Data

Nominal system voltage: 33KV
Highest system voltage: 36KV
136
Rated frequency: 50Hz
One minute power frequency withstand voltage: 75KVrms
(1.2/50 microseconds): 170KVrms
Maximum initial symmetrical three-phase fault current: 19KA rms
Ambient soil temperature: 45 oC
Thermal soil resistivity: 120 oC cm/W
7.4.12.3Construction Requirement
The conductor for the 33KV cable shall be of high quality, stranded, compacted Copper and
single core. The conductor shield shall be of semi-conductive tape for preventing ingress of
semi-conductive gluing into the stranded conductor, easily shippable even after years of
service and stresses of short circuit.
7.4.12.4Tests
Power frequency test if equipment is made available. Direct current voltage test
on cables and associated terminals.
Any defects of the cables which are discovered by the verification procedure or tests
performed as stated above shall be ratified by the contractor at no extra his own cost as
directed by and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
7.4.13 INSULATORS
Disc insulators shall be of toughened glass or porcelain, which together with their metal
fittings, shall comply with IEC 305 and BS 3288 (part 1) or other approved standard.
Insulators on straight-line towers shall be of the suspension type. Disc insulators shall be
provided with ball and socket fittings and retaining pins or locking devices. They shall be so
formed that when set and under any conditions nothing but extreme deformation of the
retaining pins or locking devices shall allow separation of the insulator units or fittings or
shall cause any risk of the retaining pins or locking devices being displaced accidentally.
Their design shall be such as to allow easy removal or replacement of the insulator units or
fittings under live line condition.
The suspension type insulators shall be used for double circuit lines while
pin insulators shall be used for single circuit lines.
7,4.14 SURGE ARRESTERS
137
Surge arresters shall be of metal-oxide type. The surge arresters shall be complete for
mounting on either fixing iron of steel structures, gantries transmission line steel towers.
Operating Counter
All types of arresters shall be equipped with operation counters for indicating the number of
times the arrester has operated on account of lightning or switching surges.
Nameplate
The following information shall appear on the nameplate of the lightning arrester.
1. rated voltage
2. rated frequency
3. nominal discharge current
4. type, manufacturer’s name and year of manufacture
7.4.15 CLAMPS AND FITTINGS

All fittings including clamps shall of approved types and shall be as light as possible. All
clamps shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming the stranded conductor and
separating the individual strands
7.4.16 INFORMATION ON THE FOUNDATIONS AND CONDUCTOR

It is compulsory for the bidder to provide the information indicated in sections A, B, C and D
below.
A. FOUNDATION FOR THE STEEL TUBULAR POLE (IF APPLICABLE)

The bidder shall provide drawings on standard foundation for the steel tubular pole. The
dimensions of the foundation shall be clearly shown.
1. No. of Pole Foundations =
2. Depth of the foundation =
3. Volume of concrete =
4. Cost of the foundation as indicated in the Price =

Schedule
5. Cost of reinforced concrete per
cubic meter (m3) of the Foundation =
138
B. FOUNDATION FOR THE STEEL TOWERS(IF APPLICABLE)

The bidder shall provide drawings on standard foundation for the steel towers.
The dimensions of the foundation shall be clearly shown.
1. No. of Pole Foundations =
2. Depth of the foundation =

Schedule
cubic meter (m3) of the Foundation =
C. REINFORCED/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE POLES

The 33kV and 11kV lines shall utilize high-tension reinforced/prestressed concrete poles
constructed in sections of spans with H- Poles separating the sections made of intermediate
poles. The high tension pole shall be 10.36m in height.
1. No. of Pole holes =
2. Depth of the foundation hole =

Schedule
cubic meter (m3) of the pole hole =
139
7.5 OUTDOOR TYPE COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED(CSP) DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS OF 11/0.415KV CLASS UPTO AND INCLUDING 50 kVA
7.5.1 SCOPE: This specification covers, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage testing,
inspection and testing before supply, delivery at site, erection and commissioning of oil
immersed, naturally cooled 3 phase 11/.415kV Completely Self Protected (CSP) type
Distribution Transformers.
7.5.1.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction
of this equipment. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards
of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee, in a manner acceptable to the
Employer, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the
power to reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not in accordance therewith.
The offered equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective
and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of
Bidder’s supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this
specification and / or the commercial order or not.
7.5.1.2 Standard Ratings:
The Standard Ratings of CSP Transformer shall be 25kVA and 50kVA.
7.5.2 STANDARDS:
7.5.2.1 The materials shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian / International
Standard Specification, with latest amendments thereof, some of them are listed
below:
Title International & Internationally recognised

standard
Specification for Power Transformer IEC-60076
Outdoor distribution Transformer up to IEC-60076
and including 50 kVA
Specification for transformer Oil BS 148
ASTM D-1275
D-1473, D-1533 – 1934
IEC Pub 60296-2003
Specification for Copper Wire rods IEC-60317, ASTM B – 49
Specification for Insulating Kraft Paper IEC-60554
Specification for Insulating Press Board IEC-60641
Specification for High Voltage Porcelain IEC-60137, IEEE-C57.19.01-2000
bushings
140
Specification for Low Voltage bushings IEC-60137
Specification for Outdoor Bushings DIN 42531 to 33
Specification for commercial grade ASTM D 1933-Type-III
Nitrogen
Specification for Metal Oxide Lightning IEC 60099-4
Arresters
Specification for colors for ready mixed RAL
paints
Guide for loading of oil Immersed IEC-60354
Transformers
Specification for LT Circuit Breaker IEC 60947-2 (1989), VDE 0645
Specification for HV Fuses for IEC-60787 , IEC-60282
Transformer Circuit
Specification for Galvanized Metal parts ISO-1461 or ASTM123/A123M-02
Material conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or

higher quality than the standards mentioned above would also be acceptable. In case the
Bidder wishes to offer material conforming to the other standards, salient points of
difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly
brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic English
Translations, shall be furnished along with the offer.
7.5.3 SERVICE CONDITIONS:
The Distribution Transformers to be supplied against this Specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions as IEC-60076
latest revision.
i) Location : At various locations in the country
ii) Max ambient air

temperature (deg.C) : 50
iii) Min. ambient air

temperature (deg.C.) : 10
iv) Max average daily ambient

air temperature (deg.C) : 45
v) Max. yearly weighed average

ambient temperature(deg.C) : 32
vi) Max. altitude above

mean sea level (Meters) : 1000
vii) Max Relative Humidity : 90%
viii) Wind Pressure : 150 kg/m2
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to
rust and fungus growth.
141
S/N Item Specification
1. Continuous rated capacity 25KVA 50 kVA

2. System voltage (max.) 12 kV 12 kV
3. Rated voltage HV 11 kV 11 kV
4. Rated voltage LV 415 V-240V 415 V-240V
5. Line current HV 1.31 A 2.62 A
6. Line current LV 34.78A 69.56A
7. Frequency 50 c/s +/-5% 50 c/s+/- 5%
8. No. of Phases Three Three
9. Connection HV Delta Delta
10. Connection LV Star (Neutral Star (Neutral
brought out) brought out)
11. Vector group Dyn-11 Dyn-11
12. Type of cooling ONAN ONAN
13. Tap changing arrangement Not applicable Not applicable
14. Noise level at rated voltage 45 db 45 db
and frequency
15. Permissible temperature rise
over ambient
i) Of top oil measured 35 Deg.C. 35 Deg.C
by thermometer
ii) Of winding measured 40 Deg.C. 40 Deg.C
by resistance
16. Minimum clearances in air --------------As per IEC-60071-2 -------------
a) HV phase to phase/ phase to earth -------------255 / 140----------
(mm) -------------75 / 40---------
b) LV phase to phase/ phase to earth
(mm)
7.5.4 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:
The Transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation with three phase, 50 c/s, 11 kV
system in which the neutral is effectively earthed and they shall be suitable for service
under fluctuations in supply voltage up to plus 10% to minus 15%.
The transformer shall conform to the following specific parameters.
7.5.5 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
7.5.5.1.Design & Construction : Core:
7.5.5.1.1Material - CRGO / AMORPHOUS Metal
a) CRGO Material
i) The core shall be generally of high grade cold rolled grain annealed steel lamination having
low loss and good grain properties, coated with hot oil proof insulation, bolted together and
to the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The complete design of core must ensure
permanency of the core losses with continuous working of the transformers. The value of
the maximum flux density allowed in the design and grade of lamination used shall be
clearly stated in the offer.
142
ii) Core Clamping for CRGO:
1. MS Channel shall be used on top and bottom

2. Core Channel on LV side to be reinforced at equidistance, if holes / cutting is
done for LT lead in order to avoid bending of channel.
3. MS Channels shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint.
iii) The transformer core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined effect of voltage
and frequency) up to 12.5% without injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not
get saturated. The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this situation.
iv) No load current shall not exceed 3% of full load current and will be measured by energising
the transformer at 415 volts, 50 c/s on the secondary. Increase of voltage of 415 volts by
12.5% shall not increase the no load current by Max. 6% of full load current. Test for
magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated phase voltage and
measurement of an, bn, cn voltage will be carried out.
v) Clamping & Tie-rods shall be made of HT steel and shall be parkarised.
b) AMORPHOUS Metal:
i) The core shall be high quality Amorphous ribbons having very low loss formed into wound
cores of rectangular shape, bolted together to the frames firmly to prevent vibration or
noise. The complete design of core must ensure permanency of the core loss with
continuous working of the transformers. The value of the flux density allowed in the design
shall be clearly stated in the offer. Curve showing the properties of the metal shall be
attached with the offer.
ii) Core Clamping - Amorphous Metal Transformers
1 Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps made of sheet
steel clamped MS tie rods for efficient clamping.
2. MS core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint.
3. MS rods shall be used as tie rods.
4. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp / bottom plate of the
transformer to arrest movement of the active part.
7.5.5.2 The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined effect of voltage
and frequency) upto 12.5% without injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get
saturated. The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this situation.
7.5.5.3 No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be measured by energising
the transformer at 415 volts, 50c/s on the secondary. Increase of voltage of 415 volts by
12.5% shall not increase the no load current by Max. 5% of full load current. Test for
magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated phase voltage and
measurement of an, bn, cn voltage will be carried out.
NOTE: “Equal weightage shall be given to the transformers with Amorphous metal core and
CRGO”. For this project, AMORPHOUS METAL CORE is selected in view of its low
iron loss.
7.5.6 WINDINGS:
a) Material: Super enamel covered copper conductor / DPC copper conductor.
143
b) LV winding shall be in even layers so that neutral formation will be at top.
c) The winding construction of single HV coil wound over LV coil is preferable.
d) Inter layer insulation shall be Epoxy dotted Kraft Paper.
e) Proper bonding of inter layer insulation with the conductor shall be ensured. Test
for Bonding strength to be conducted.
f) Dimensions of winding coils are very critical. Dimensional tolerances for winding
coils shall be within limits as specified in GTP.
7.5.6.1 Oil :
The insulating oil shall comply with the requirements of relevant standards IEC-
60296(2003).
7.5.7 LOSSES : The maximum losses at rated voltage and rated frequency permitted at 75 deg.
C. are indicated below:
Voltage kVA No Load Full load losses

Ratio Rating losses in in Watts (Max)
Watts (Max.) at 75 deg.c
AMT CRGO
11000/415 - 240 V 25 28 80 615
11000/415 - 240 V 50 50 126 938
The above losses are maximum allowable and there would not be any positive tolerance.
Bids with higher losses than the above specified values would be treated as Non-
responsive.
Transformers with losses less than those specified above will be capitalised during bid
evaluation as indicated below.
Loss Capitalisation factors:

A. Iron Losses - US $ 5.2/Watt
B. Copper Losses - US $ 1.0/Watt
7.5.7.1 Percentage Impedance:
The value of impedance of transformers at 75 Deg. C shall be 4.5% subject to

the tolerance specified in the standard IEC-60076
7.5.7.2 Temperature rise: The temperature rise over ambient shall not exceed the limits
described below:
Top oil temperature rise measured by thermometer : 35 deg.C
Winding temperature rise measured by resistance : 40 deg.C
Bids not meeting the above limits of temperature rise will be treated as
non-responsive
7.5.8 PENALTY FOR EXCESSIVE LOSSES:
144
7.5.8.1 During testing, if it is found that the actual measured losses are more than the values
quoted by the bidder penalty shall be recovered from the bidder at double the loss
capitalization rate arrived at clause 5.3. For fraction of a kW, proportionate penalty will be
recovered.
7.5.8.2 Transformers with temperature rise and impedance beyond guaranteed values:
7.5.8.2.1Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at supplier’s
works, if the temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values.
7.5.8.2.2Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at supplier’s
works, if the impedance values differ from the guaranteed values including
tolerance.
7.5.8.2.3Purchaser also reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it into
service until the Bidder replaces it with a new transformer at no extra cost. The
delivery as per contract will be counted when the new transformer as per
specification is provided by the manufacture.
7.5.9 INSULATION MATERIAL :

a) Material: Electrical grade insulation Kraft Paper of standard make or better material
subject to approval of the purchaser. Pressboard of standard make or better material
subject to approval of purchaser.
b) All spacers, axial wedges / runners used in windings shall be made of pre-compressed
Pressboard−solid, conforming to type B 3.1 of IEC 641-3-2. The insulation coordination
between the various insulating materials and conductng parts shall be as per IEC-60664 for
LV and as per IEC-60071 for HV. All spacers shall be properly sheared and dovetail
punched to ensure proper locking. All axial wedges / runners shall be properly milled to
dovetail shape so that they pass through the designed spacers freely. Insulation shearing,
cutting, milling and punching operations shall be carried out in such a way, that there
should not be any burr and dimensional variations.
7.5.10 TANK:
The transformer tank can be with radiator fins or made of corrugated panels.
a) For Rectangular plain tank:
i. The transformer tank shall be of robust construction rectangular in shape and shall be built
up of tested MS sheets.
ii. The internal clearance of tank shall be such that, it shall facilitate easy lifting of core with
coils from the tank without dismantling LV bushings.
iii. All joints of tank and fittings shall be oil tight and no bulging should occur during service.
The tank design shall be such that the core and windings can be lifted freely. The tank
plate shall be of such strength that the complete transformers when filled with oil may be
lifted bodily by means of lifting lugs. Inside of tank shall be painted with varnish / Hot oil.
iv. Manufacturer should carry out the all welding operations as per the relevant ASME
standards and submit a copy of the welding procedure qualifications and welder
performance qualification certificates to the customer.
145
v. The four walls of the tank shall be made of Two “L” shaped sheets (without joints) fully
welded at the corners from inside and outside of the tank for withstanding a pressure of 0.8
kg/cm2 for 10 minutes.
vi. The tank shall be reinforced by welded angle on all the outside walls on the edge of the
tank to form two equal compartments. Permanent deflection when the tank without oil is
subject to a vacuum of 525 mm of mercury for rectangular tank and 760 mm of mercury for
round tank shall not be more than 5 mm upto 750 mm length and 6 mm up to 1250 mm
length. The tank shall further be capable of withstanding a pressure of 0.8 kg/sq. cm (g)
and a vacuum of 0.3 kg/sq. cm(g) without any deformation.
vii. a) Circular cross section cooling tubes of not less than 38 mm dia and 1.25 mm thick bent
& directly welded to tank shall be provided. The transformer shall be capable of giving
continuous rated output without exceeding the specified temperature rise. Bidder shall
submit the calculation sheet.
b) Lifting lugs: 4 Nos. welded heavy duty lifting lugs of MS plate 8 mm thick (min) suitably
reinforced by vertical supporting flat welded edgewise below the lug on the side wall.
c) Pulling lugs: 4 Nos. of welded heavy duty pulling lugs of MS plate 8 mm thick (min) shall
be provided to pull the transformer horizontally.
d) Top cover fixing bolts of G.I, 12 mm dia spaced at 100 mm apart, 6 mm Neoprene
bonded cork gaskets conforming to IEC-60076 shall be placed between tank and cover.
The bolts outside tank shall have 2 flat washers & one spring washer.
Tank Sealing: The space on the top of the oil shall be filled with dry air or nitrogen. The
nitrogen plus oil volume inside the tank shall be such that even under extreme operating
conditions, the pressure generated inside the tank does not exceed 0.4 kg/sq. cm positive
or negative. The nitrogen shall conform to commercial grade of the relevant Standard.
‘U’ shaped pressure relief vent of 2” diameter pipe with copper shim sheet as diaphragm
shall be provided on the top of the cover of the tank, such that the pressure released
should be directed to the ground. The vent shall be provided on opposite side of the circuit
breaker operating rod. The length of the vent pipe shall be such that, its one end should
project into the tank, so that its end is 10 mm above the minimum Oil level. The other end
of the vent pipe shall be guarded with wire mesh for preventing the entry of worms and
nesting. The diaphragm shall burst at a pressure of 0.76 to 0.95 kg/sq.cm.
Conservator shall not be provided for these transformers.
b) For corrugated Tank:
The bidder may offer with corrugated tanks for 50kVA.Transformer tank shall be of robust
construction corrugation in shape and shall be built up of tested sheets of required thickness.
i. The internal clearance of tank shall be such that, it shall facilitate easy lifting of core with
coils from the tank and CCA, HV& LV bushings mounted on Top cover.
ii. All joints of tank and fittings shall be oil tight and no bulging should occur during service. The
tank design shall be such that the core and windings can be lifted freely. The tank plate shall
146
be of such strength that the complete transformers when filled with oil may be lifted bodily by
means of lifting lugs. Inside of tank shall be painted with varnish / Hot oil.
iii. Manufacturer should carry out the all welding operations as per the relevant ASME
standards and submit a copy of the welding procedure qualifications and welder performance
qualification certificates to the customer.
iv. Corrugation panel shall be used for cooling. The transformer shall be capable of giving
continuous rated output without exceeding the specified temperature rise. Bidder shall
submit the calculation sheet.
v. Lifting lugs: 4 Nos. welded heavy duty lifting lugs of MS plate 8 mm thick (min) suitably
reinforced.
vi. Top cover fixing bolts of G.I adequately spaced and 6 mm Neoprene bonded cork gaskets
conforming to IEC-60076 shall be placed between tank and cover. The bolts outside tank
shall have 2 flat washers & one spring washer.
7.5.11 SURFACE PREPARATION & PAINTING
7.5.11.1General
7.5.11.1.1All paints shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s
recommendations. Particular attention shall be paid to the following:
a) Proper storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of temperature.

b) Surface preparation prior to painting.
c) Mixing and thinning
d) Application of paints and the recommended limit on time intervals between
coats.
e) Shelf life for storage
7.5.11.1.2 All paints, when applied in a normal full coat, shall be free from runs, sags, wrinkles,
patchiness, brush marks or other defects.
7.5.11.1.3 All primers shall be well marked into the surface, particularly in areas where
painting is evident, and the first priming coat shall be applied as soon as possible
after cleaning. The paint shall be applied by airless spray according to
manufacturer’s recommendations. However, where ever airless spray is not
possible, conventional spray be used with prior approval of Purchaser.
7.5.11.1.4 The Supplier shall, prior to painting protect nameplates, lettering gauges, sight
glasses, light fittings and similar such items.
7.5.11.2 Cleaning and Surface Preparation
7.5.11.2.1 After all machining, forming and welding has been completed, all steel work
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, welding slag or spatter and
other contamination prior to any painting.
7.5.11.2.2 Steel surfaces shall be prepared by Sand / Shot blast cleaning or Chemical
cleaning by Seven Tank process including Phosphating to the appropriate quality.
147
7.5.11.2.3 The pressure and volume of the compressed air supply for blast cleaning shall meet
the work requirements and shall be sufficiently free from all water contamination to
ensure that the cleaning process is not impaired.
7.5.11.2.4 Chipping, scraping and steel wire brushing using manual or power driven tools
cannot remove firmly adherent mill-scale shall only be used where blast cleaning is
impractical. Manufacturer to explain such areas in his technical offer clearly.
7.5.11.3 Protective Coating
7.5.11.3.1 As soon as all items have been cleaned and within four hours of the subsequent
drying, they shall be given suitable anti-corrosion protection.
7.5.11.4 Paint Material
Followings are the types of paint that may be suitably used for the items to be
painted at shop and supply of matching paint to site: RAL-7032
7.5.11.4.1 Heat resistant paint (Hot oil proof)/ Varnish for inside surface.
7.5.11.4.2 For external surface one coat of Thermo Setting paint or 1 coat of Zinc chromate
primer followed by 2 coats of Polyurethene base Paint. These paints can be either
air drying or stoving.
7.5.11.4.3 The color of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray
7.5.11.5 Painting Procedure
7.5.11.5.1 All painting shall be carried out in conformity with both Specification and with the
paint manufacturer’s recommendation. All paints in any one particular system,
whether shop or site applied, shall originate from one paint manufacturer.
7.5.11.5.2 Particular attention shall be paid to the manufacturer’s instructions on storage,

mixing, thinning and pot life. The paint shall only be applied in the manner detailed
by the manufacturer e.g. brush, roller, conventional or airless spray and shall be
applied under the manufacturer’s recommended condition. Minimum and maximum
time intervals between coats shall be closely followed.
7.5.11.5.3 All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before visible re-rusting occurs or
within 4 hours, whichever is sooner.
Chemical treated steel surfaces shall be primed as soon as the surface is dry and
while the surface is till warm.
7.5.11.5.4 Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film thickness (wrinkling, mud
cracking or general softness) the Supplier shall remove the unsatisfactory paint
coating and apply another. As a general rule, dry film thickness should not exceed
the specified minimum dry film thickens by more than 25%. In all instances where
two or more coats of the same paint are specified, such coatings may or may not
be of contrasting colours.
7.5.11.5.5 Paint applied to items that are not be painted shall be removed at Supplier’s
expense, leaving the surface clean, unstained and undamaged.
148
7.5.11.6 Damaged Paintwork
7.5.11.6.1 Any damage occurring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made good to the
same standard of corrosion protection and appearance as that originally employed.
7.5.11.6.2 Any damaged paint work shall be made good as follows:
a) The damaged area, together with an area extending 25 mm around its boundary,
shall be cleaned down to bare metal.
b) A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed by a full paint finish equal to
that originally
applied and extending 50 mm around the perimeter of the original damage.
c) The repainted surface shall present a smooth surface. This shall be obtained by
carefully
chamfering the paint edges before and after priming.
7.5.11.7 Dry Film Thickness
7.5.11.7.1 To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as a continuous film
of uniform thickness and free of pores. Overspray, skips, runs, sags and drips
should be avoided. The different coats may or may not be of the same colour.
7.5.11.7.2 Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
7.5.11.7.3 Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at edges.
7.5.11.7.4 The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of paint and the materials to be
used shall be as given below.
Sl. Paint Type Area to be painted No. of Total Dry film

No coats thickness (min.)
.
1. Thermo setting paint. inside 01 20 microns
outside 01 60 microns
2. Liquid paint
a) Zinc chromate outside 01 30 microns
(primer)
b) Polyurethene outside 02 25 microns each
(Finish coat)
c) Hot oil paint / Varnish inside 01 35 / 10 microns
7.5.11.8 Tests
7.5.11.8.1 The painted surface shall be tested for paint thickness.
7.5.11.8.2 The painted surface shall pass the Cross Hatch Adhesion test, Salt spray test and
Hardness test as per the relevant ASTM standards.
NOTE: Supplier shall guarantee the painting performance requirement for a period of
149
not less than 5 years.
7.5.12 BUSHINGS:
i) The bushings shall conform to the relevant standards specified and shall be outdoor.
The bushing rods and nuts shall be made of brass material 12 mm diameter for both HT &
LT. The bushings shall be fixed to the transformers on sided with straight pockets and in
the same plane. The tests as per IEC-60076 and IEC-60137 shall be conducted on the
transformer bushings as detailed below.
a) Dry power frequency voltage withstand test

b) Wet power frequency voltage withstand test
c) Dry lightning Impulse voltage withstand test (1.2/50 micro seconds
positive wave)
ii) For 11 kV, 17.5 kV class bushings shall be used and for 0.415 kV, 1.1 kV class bushings
shall be used. Bushings of plain shades shall be mounted on the side of the Tank and not
on top cover.
iii) Dimensions of the bushings of the voltage class shall conform to the Standards
specified.
iv) A minimum phase to phase clearance of 75 mm for LV (up to 1.1 kV bushings) and 255
mm for HV bushings shall be obtained with the bushing mounted on the transformer.
v) The bushings shall be fixed on sides with pockets in the same plane. Arcing horns shall
not be provided and instead brass caps shall be provided.
vi) Brazing of all inter connections, jumpers from winding to bushing shall have cross
section larger than the winding conductor. All the Brazers shall be qualified as per ASME,
Section – IX..
In the case of LV bushing, the internal bushing shall be made of tough insulating material
like epoxy and shall have embedded stem.
The LV bushings shall be so located that even under the hottest conditions the level of the
transformer oil shall be below the opening meant for fixing the LV bushings. The V
jumpers and bushing material shall be selected and designed for this condition.
The design of the internal bushing for LV shall be such as to provide adequate earth
clearance and creepage distance as stipulated in the standards specified. All other tests as
per relevant standards shall be applicable.
The bushings shall be of reputed make supplied by those manufacturers who are having
manufacturing and testing facilities for manufacture of insulators.
The terminal arrangement shall not require a separate oil chamber not connected to oil in
the main tank.
7.5.13 TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
The LV bushing and HV bushing stems shall be provided with suitable terminal connectors
so as to connect the jumper without disturbing the bushing stem. Connectors shall be with
150
eye bolts so as to receive 55 sq.mm. conductor for HV, Terminal connectors must have
type tested as per IEC-60999-2
.
7.5.14 TERMINAL MARKINGS
High voltage and Low voltage phase windings shall be marked both in the terminal boards
inside the tank and on the outside with capital letter 1U, 1V, 1W and low voltage winding for
the same phase marked by corresponding small letter 2u, 2v, 2w. The neutral point
terminal shall be indicated by the letter 2n. Neutral terminal to be brought out and
connected to local grounding terminal by an Earthing strip.
7.5.15 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
CT’s shall be provided if required on secondary side for both 25kVA and 50kVA DTs.
a. Current Transformer shall be mounted inside the Tank on LV side of the transformer.
b. The current transformers shall comply with IEC-60044-1
c. All secondary leads of bushing mounted CT’s shall be brought to a terminal box near
each bushing. The CT terminals shall have shorting facility.
d. CT should not get saturated up to 200% of rated current.
e. CT parameters indicated under Technical parameters are tentative and are liable to
change within reasonable limits. The contractor shall obtain Owner’s approval before
proceeding with the design of CT’s.
DT RATING 50 kVA
CTR 100/5 A
CLASS 0.5
BURDEN 20 VA
APPLICATION METERING
ISF 5
7.5.17 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS:
9 kV, 5 kA Metal Oxide Lightning Arresters as per relevant standard, one number per
phase shall be fitted under the HV bushings with GI earth strip 25x4 mm connected to the
body of the transformer with necessary clamping arrangements. The metal oxide lightning
arresters shall be of reputed make.
7.5.18 FITTINGS:
The following standard fittings shall be provided.

a) Rating and terminal marking plates non-detachable
b) Earthing terminals with lugs - 2 Nos.
c) Lifting lugs for main tank & top cover
d) Terminal connectors on the HV/LV bushings
e) Thermometer pocket with cap - 1 No.
f) Air release device
g) HV bushings - 3 Nos.
151
h) LV bushings - 4 Nos.
i) Pulling lugs - 4 Nos
j) Stiffener angle 40x40x5 mm and vertical strip of 50x5 mm flat
k) Radiators - No. & length may be mentioned (as per heat dissipation
calculations)
l) Arcing horns
m) Oil level guage indicating the positions of oil marked as follows
min ( -5 deg.C)
30 deg.C
max ( 98 deg.C)
n) Base cannel 75x40 mm
7.5.19 FASTENERS:
All bolts, studs, screw threads, pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall comply with the
appropriate International Standards for metric threads, or the technical equivalent.
Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used for small wiring
terminals.
All nuts and pins shall be adequately locked.
Wherever possible bolts shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event of failure of
locking resulting in the nuts working loose and falling off, the bolt will remain in position.
All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall be treated to prevent
corrosion, by hot dip galvanising, except high tensile steel bolts and spring washers which
shall be electro-galvanised/ plated. Appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent
electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.
Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three threads through
the nut, except when otherwise approved for terminal board studs or relay stems. If bolts
nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, special
spanners shall be provided.
The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw thread may form
part of a shear plane between members.
Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.
Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or the securing
screws.
7.5.20 MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT:
The under base of all transformers shall be provided with two 75 x 40 mm channels
460 mm long with holes to make them suitable for fixing on a platform or plinth or pole
mounting.
152
7.5.21 OVERLOAD CAPACITY
The transformers shall be suitable for loading as per IEC-60354
7.5.22 THE TRANSFORMERS SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING CSP FEATURES
i) Internal HV fuse on the HT side of transformer:
Specification for the HV fuses: Expulsion/any other suitable type of fuse placed in series
with the primary winding. This fuse is mounted normally inside of the primary bushing for
the three phases and is connected to the high voltage winding through a terminal block.
This has to protect that part of the electrical distribution system which is ahead of the
distribution transformers from faults which occur inside the distribution transformer i.e.,
either in the windings or some other part of the transformer. It shall be ensured that this
fuse does not blow for faults on the secondary side (LT side) of the transformer i.e., the
blowing characteristics of the fuse and LT breaker shall be so coordinated such that the
fuse shall not blow for any faults on the secondary side of the transformer beyond LT
breakers and those faults shall be cleared by the LT breaker only.
ii) Internally mounted oil immersed LT breaker on the LV side of the transformer:
3 Pole LT circuit breaker: All LT faults after the breaker shall be cleared by this breaker.
As such it shall be designed for perfect coordination with the HT fuse link. The Bidder shall
furnish the time / current characteristics of LT circuit breaker and 11 kV fuses for
various current multiples.
The two characteristics shall be drawn on the same sheet to indicate coordination between
the circuit breaker and fuse. The Bidder shall carry out coordination test as indicated
above and this forms one of the tests for acceptance test.
The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow closely the
variations of coil temperature due to fluctuating loads and ambient temperatures.
This is to be accomplished by connecting the breaker in series between the secondary

winding and the secondary bushings. The breaker shall be located in the same oil as the
core and coil assembly so that the bimetal are sensitive to the temperature of oil as well as
the load current (offers with LV breaker of MCCB type are not acceptable to the purchaser).
The circuit breaker shall also be closed and opened manually standing on ground. The
current carrying parts of breakers shall be copper plus a set of copper tungsten current
interrupting contacts.
The cross section of the current carrying parts of the breaker shall withstand the full load
current at a current density not more than 2.5A/sq.mm (for additional mechanical strength
the area should be more).
iii) Load Management Signal Light:
A signal light shall be provided to give information about the loading condition of the
transformer. It shall forewarn any overloading problem at the installation such that a
replacement of the existing transformer with a higher capacity transformer can be planned.
The signal light mechanism shall not reset itself when the load drops from the overloaded
condition. The signal light shall remain lighted once the signal light contacts close due to
153
overload and can be turned off by manual operation. (The signal light shall not give
indication for momentary overloading).
7.5.23 TESTS:
a) All the equipment offered shall be fully type tested by the bidder or his collaborator as per
the relevant standards including the additional type tests mentioned at clause 6.2. The
type test must have been conducted on a transformer of same design.
b) Special tests other than type and routine tests, as agreed between Employer and Bidder
shall also be carried out as per the relevant standards.
c) The requirements of site tests are also given in this clause.
d) The test certificates for all routine and type tests for the transformers and also for the
bushings and transformer oil shall be submitted with the bid.
7.5.24 ROUTINE TESTS:
1. Ratio, polarity and phase sequence.

2. No Load current and losses at service voltage and formal frequency
3. Load losses at rated current and normal frequency
4. Impedance Voltage test
5. Resistance of windings cold at each tap.(at or near the test bed temp.)
6. Insulation resistance
7. Induced over voltage withstand test.
8 Separate source voltage withstand test.
9 Circuit Breaker coordination test.
10 Neutral current measurement
11 Oil samples (one sample per lot) to comply with IEC-60296 (2003)
12 Measurement of no load losses and magnetising current at rated frequency
and 90%,100% &110% voltage.
7.5.25 TYPE TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED ON ONE UNIT

In addition to the Tests mentioned in para 6.1 following Tests shall be conducted.
1.Temperature rise test for determining the maximum temperature rise after continuous
full load run. The ambient temperature and time of test should be stated in the test
certificate.
2. Impulse voltage test: As per per IEC-60076 and IEC-BIL for 11 kV shall be 95 kV
Peak .
3. Air Pressure Test: As per relevant IEC Standard.
4 Short Circuit withstand test: Thermal and dynamic ability.
5 Oil samples (post short circuit & temperature rise test)
6 Un-balanced current test: The value of unbalanced current indicated by the
ammeter shall not be than 2% of the full load current.
7 Noise level measurement
8 Measurement of zero phase sequence impedance
9 Measurement of the harmonics of no load current
10 Vacuum test
Transformer tank shall be subjected to specified vacuum. The tank designed for
vacuum shall be tested at an internal pressure of 0.35 Kg per square centimeter,
absolute, (250 mm of Hg) for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after
154
the vacuum has been released shall not exceed the values specified below:
Horizontal length of flat plate (in mm) Permanenmt deflection in

mm
Up to & including 750 5.0
751 to 1250 6.5
1251 to 1750 8.0
1751 to 2000 9.5
2001 to 2250 11.0
2251 to 2500 12.0
2501 to 3000 16.0
above 3000 19.0
11. Pressure Test

Transformer tank together with its radiator and other fittings shall be subjected to
pressure corresponding to twice the normal pressure or 0.35 Kg per square
centimeter whichever is lower measured at the base of the tank and maintained for
an hour. The permanent deflection of the flat plates after the excess pressure has
been released shall not exceed the figures for vacuum test.
For corrugated tanks the pressure test shall be conducted at 0.2 kg/cm2.
12. Pressure relief device test
The pressure relief device shall be subject to increasing fluid pressure. It shall
operate before reaching the test pressure as specified in the above clause. The
operating pressure shall be recorded. The device shall seal off after the excess
pressure has been released.
Type test certificates for the tests carried out on prototype of same specifications
shall be submitted along with the bid.
The Employer may select the transformer for type tests randomly.
7.5.26 TESTS AT SITE
The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on Transformer

after arrival at site and the manufacturer shall guarantee test certificate figures under
actual service conditions.
7.5.27 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The transformers shall be subjected to the following routine/ acceptance test in presence of
purchaser’s representative at the place of manufacture before despatch without any extra
charges. The testing shall be carried out in accordance with IEC-60076.
1. Checking of weights, dimensions, fitting and accessories, tank sheet thickness, oil
quality, material, finish and workmanship as per QTP/QA Plan and contract
drawings.
2 Physical verification of core coil assembly and measurement of flux density of one
unit of each rating, in every inspection with reference to short circuit test report
3. All tests as specified in clause 6.1
155
7.5.28 TOLERANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein the test value of the transformers supplied would be
within the tolerance permitted in the relevant standards. No positive tolerance is allowed on
guaranteed No Load and Load losses.
7.5.29 INSPECTION
All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless other wise
specifically agreed upon by the manufacturer and the Employer at the time of purchase.
The manufacturer shall afford the Engineer representing the Employer all reasonable
facilities, without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with specification.
The manufacturer shall provide all services to establish and maintain quality of
workmanship in his works and that of his sub-contractors to ensure the mechanical /
electrical performance of components, compliance with drawings, identification and
acceptability of all materials, parts and equipment as per latest quality standards of ISO
9000.
Along with the bid the manufacturer shall prepare Quality Assurance Plan identifying the
various stages of manufacture, quality checks performed at each stage and the Customer
hold points. The document shall also furnish details of method of checking, inspection and
acceptance standards / values and get the approval of Employer or his representative
before proceeding with manufacturing. However, Employer or his representative shall have
the right to review the inspection reports, quality checks and results of manufacturer’s in-
house inspection department which are not customer hold points and the manufacturer
shall comply with the remarks made by Employer or his representative on such reviews
with regards to further testing, rectification or rejection etc. Manufacturer should submit the
list of equipment for testing along with latest calibration certificates to the Employer.
The Employer shall have every right to appoint a third party inspection to carry out the
inspection process. The Employer has the right to have the test carried out at his own cost
by an independent agency wherever the dispute regarding the quality of supply. The
Employer has right to test 1% of the supply selected either from the stores or field to check
the quality of the product. In case of any deviation the Employer have every right to reject
the entire lot or penalize the manufacturer, which may lead to blacklisting among other
things.
7.5.30 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
7.5.30.1The Bidder shall invariably furnish the following information along with his bid, failing
which his bid shall be liable for rejection. Information shall be separately given for
individual type of equipment offered.
i Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-suppliers for the raw
materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested. List of
tests normally carried out on raw materials in the presence of Bidder’s
representative, copies of test certificates.
ii. Information and copies of test certificates as in (I) above in respect of bought out
accessories.
156
iii. List of manufacturing facilities available.
iv. Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists.
v List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspection.
vi List of testing equipment available with the bidder for final testing of equipment
along with valid calibration reports shall be furnished with the bid. Manufacturer
shall posses 0.1 class instruments for measurement of losses.
vii Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with hold points for Employer’s Inspection as per
Annexure.
7.5.30.2The successful Bidder shall within 30 days of placement of order, submit following
information to the Employer.
i List of raw materials as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub-
suppliers selected from those furnished along with offer.
ii. Type test certificates of the raw materials and bought out accessories.
7.5.30.3The successful Bidder shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out
accessories and central excise passes for raw material at the time of routine testing.
7.5.31 DOCUMENTATION
The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the dimensional drawings of the items offered
indicating all the fittings.
(i) Dimensional tolerances

(ii) Weight of individual components and total weight
7.5.32 PACKING & FORWARDING:
7.5.32.1 The packing shall be done as per the manufacturer’s standard practice. However, it
should be ensured that the packing is such that, the material would not get damaged
during transit by Rail / Road / Sea.
7.5.32.2 The making on each package shall be as per the relevant IEC.
7.5.33 MANADATORY SPARES:
Mandatory spares shall be supplied as per the Employer’s requirement.
7.5.34 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The EPC Contractor shall have the responsibility of arranging for the Factory Acceptance
tests for the Distribution Transformers. The Contractor shall bear the cost for all personal
expenses, flight tickets and accomodation for four(4) of the Employer’s representatives that
will witness the FAT.
157
ANNEXURE-I
GUARANTEED & OTHER PARTICULARS FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
(To be furnished by the Manufacturer)
Sl.No Description 25 kVA 50 kVA

.
1. Make & Manufacturer
2. Place of Manufacture
3. Applicable Standard
4. Voltage Ratio 11000/415V 11000/415V
5. Rating in kVA 25 kVA 50 kVA
6. Core Material used and Grade
a) Flux density
b) Over fluxing without
saturation (Curve to be furnished
by the Manufacturer in support
of his claim)
7. Maximum temperature rise of
a) windings by resistance method
b) Oil by Thermometer
8. Magnetising (No load) Current at
a) Normal Voltage
b) Maximum Voltage
9. Core loss in watts
a) Normal Voltage
b) Maximum Voltage
10. Resistance of Windings at 20 deg. C
(with 5% tolerance)
a. HV Winding (ohms)
b. LV Winding (ohms)
11. Full load losses (watts) at 75 deg.C.
12. Current density used for
a) HV Winding
b) LV Winding
13. Clearances
a) Core & LV
b) LV & HV
c) HV Phase to Phase
d) End insulation clearance to Earth
e) Any point of winding to tank
14. Efficiency at 75 deg.C.
a) Unity P.F. &
b) 0.8 P.F.
1) 125% load
2) 100% load
3) 75% load
4) 50% load
5) 25% load
15. Regulation at
a) Unity P.F.
b) 0.8 P.F. at 75 deg.C.
16. % Impedance at 75 deg.C.
17 Flash Test
. HV 28 kV / 50 Hz for 1 minute
158
LV 3 kV/50 Hz for 1 minute
18 Over potential Test Double Voltage &

Double frequency for 1 minute
19 Impulse test
20 Weight content of
a) Core lamination (min)
b) Windings (min)
c) Tank & Fittings
d) Oil
e) Oil qty (min)
f) Total Weight
21 Oil Data
1. Qty for first filling (min)
2. Grade of oil used
3. Maker’s name
4. BDV at the time of filling
22 Transformer:
1) Overall length x breadth x height
2) Tank length x breadth x height
3) Thickness of plates for
a) Side plate (min)
b) Top & Bottom plate (min)
23 Radiation:
1) Heat dissipation by tank walls exclusive top & bottom
2) Heat dissipation by cooling tube
3) Dia & thickness of cooling tube
4) Whether calculation sheet for selecting cooling
area to ensure that the transformer is capable
of giving continuous rated output without exceeding
temperature rise is enclosed.
24 Inter layer insulation provided in design for
1) Top & bottom layer
2) In between all layer
3) Details of end insulation
4) Whether wedges are provided at 50% turns of the HV coil
25 Insulation materials provided
a) For Conductors (1) HV (2) LV
b For Core
26 Size of the wire used
1) HV a) SWG/mm
b) Dia
2) LV a) Strip size
b) No. of Conductors in parallel
c) Total area of cross section (sq.mm.)
27 Is the name plate gives all particulars as required in Tender
28 Particulars of Bushings HV / LV
1) Maker’s name
2) Type / IEC
159
3) Rating as per IEC
4) Dry Power frequency voltage withstand test
5) Wet Power frequency voltage withstand test
29 Particulars of Metal oxide lightning arrester
30 Medium of free space above oil level for CSP Transformer oil
NOTE: The following shall be specifically confirmed

1. Whether the offer conforms to the limits of impedance mentioned in the
specification
2. Whether the offer conforms to the limits of temperature rise mentioned in the
specification
3. Whether the losses of the transformers offered are within the limits specified
4. Whether the transformer offered is already type tested for the design and test
reports enclosed.
160
ANNEXURE-II
ADDITIONAL DETAILS
Sl.No. Description
1. Core Grade
2. Core diameter mm
3. Gross Core area cm
4. Net Core area cm
5. Flux density Tesla
6. Wt. of Core kg.
7. Loss per kg. of Core at the W/kg
Specified Flux density ( Epstein Value)
8. Core window height mm
9. Center to center distance of the core mm
10. No. of L.V. Turns mm
11. No. of H V turns
12. Size of LV Conductor bare/ covered mm
13. Size of HV conductor bare/covered mm
14. No. of parallels
15. Current density of LV winding amps/sq.mm.
16. Current density of HV winding amps/sq.mm
17. Wt. of the LV winding for Transformer kg.
18. Wt. of the HV winding for Transformer kg.
19. No. of LV Coils/phase
20. No. of HV coils . phase
21. Height of LV Windings mm
22. Height of HV winding mm
23. ID/OD of LV winding mm
24. ID/OD of LV winding mm
25. Size of the duct in LV winding mm
26. Size of the duct in HV winding mm
27. Size of the duct between HV & LV mm
28. HV winding to LV clearance mm
29. HV winding to tank clearance mm
30. Calculated impedance %
31. HV to earth creepage distance mm
32. LV to earth creepage distance mm
161
ANNEXURE-III
SOURCE OF MATERIALS/PLACES OF MANUFACTURE, TESTING AND INSPECTION
Sl.No. Item Source of Place of Place of testing

Material Manufacture and inspection
1. Laminations
2. Aluminium / Copper
3. Insulated winding wires
4. Oil
5. Press Boards
6. Kraft Paper
7. MS Plates / Angles / Channels
8. Gaskets
9. Bushing HV / LV
10. Paints
11. Lightening Arresters
162
ACRONYMS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference Abbreviations Name and Address
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IEC International Electro Technical

Commission Bureau Central de la
Commission Electro Technique
International, Rue de verembe
Geneva, Switzerland
ISO International Organisation for

Standardisation,
Danish Board of Standardisation
Aurchoegyej-12
DK-2900, Heerprup,
DENMARK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
163
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN FOR CSP DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
Scope and Purpose:

This document indicates the requirement expected by the Purchaser from the
manufacturer of Transformers. Manufacturer shall submit for purchaser’s approval a
quality assurance plan in line with this document incorporating specific document
numbers for “format of records”, “acceptance norms” and “ reference documents” for
purchaser’s approval.
Quality assurance plan is the document setting out the specific quality practices,
resources, and sequence of activities relevant to a particular product. Quality plan helps
both the purchaser and supplier as it defines each and every material used, every stage
of manufacturing process, characteristics to be checked, extent of check, reference
documents, acceptance norm and format of record specifically.
Abbreviations:
PS - Plant Standard / Process Specification
TR - Test Report
IS - Indian/ International Standard
CS - Customer Specification
AD - Approved Document such as Drawing, Purchase Order
V - Verified by
P - Performed by
W - Witnessed by
H - Hold by Purchaser
1 - Purchaser
2 - Manufacturer
3 - External laboratory
4 - Sub Vendor QC
Notes:
1. Minor: The characteristics of a component, process or operation whose
failure neither materially reduce the usability of the product in
operation, nor does it affect the aesthetic aspects.
2. Major: The characteristics of a component, process, or operation whose
failure may cause operation failure which cannot be readily
corrected,at site cause substandard performance
increase erection and maintenance cost, reduce life or seriously
affect aesthetics.
3. Critical: The characteristic of a component, process, or operation failure of
which will surely cause operating failure or intermittent troubles
which is difficult to rectify at site or render the unit unfit for use or
safety hazards.
4. “Failure” of a characteristic means failure to meet the ‘accepted norms’
5. Sampling Generally sampling will be done in accordance with IEC-60076
If 100% Witness of tests are carried out by the Prime Supplier,Customer will witness on
sample basis. If 100% witness of tests is carried out by the Sub-Vendor, the Manufacturer
will witness on sample basis.
164
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN FOR CSP DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
SL. COMPONENT CHARACTERISTI CLAS TYPE OF QUANT REFERENCE ACCEPTANC FORMAT AGENCY REMARK
& CS S UM E OF S
NO OPERATIONS CHECK OF DOCUMENT NORMS RECORD V P W H
CHECK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RAW
MATERIALS
1. CRGO coils / Dimensions Major Measurement 100 %
Amorphous Specific losses Major Measurement 100
ribbons %(sam
ple
from
each
coil)
Chemical Major Measurement Sample
Analysis / lot
Surface Major Measurement 100%(s
Insulation ample
Resistance from
each
coil)
Transit Damages Major Visual 100 %
Stacking Factor Major Measurement 100
%(sam
ple
from
each
coil)
2. Copper Wire Tensile strength Major Measurement 100 %
Rods(Coils) Elongation Major Measurement 100 %
Dimensions Major Measurement 100 %
Transit damages Major Visual 100 %
Cracks & twists Major Visual 100 %
165
Resistivity Major Measurement 100
%(sam
ple
from
each
bundle
/ coil)
Chemical Major Measurement one
Analysis sample/
Consig
nment
3. Aluminium Tensile strength Major Measurement 100 %
Wire
Rods(Coils) Elongation Major Measurement 100 %
Transit damages Major Visual 100 %
Cracks & twists Major Visual 100 %
Resistivity Major Measurement 100 %
Chemical Major Measurement one
Analysis sample/
Consig
nment
4. Kraft Paper Transit Damages Major Visual 100 %
& Packing
Condition
Dimensions Major Measurement 10 % of
lot
Density Major Measurement 100%
Tensile Strength Major Measurement (sampl
Elongation Major Measurement e from
each
coil)
166
SL. COMPONENT CHARACTERIS CLAS TYPE OF QUANTUM REFEREN ACCEPTAN FORMAT AGENCY REMARK
& TICS S CE CE OF S
NO CHECK OF CHECK DOCUME NORMS RECORD V P W H
OPERATIONS NT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Moisture content Major Measurem Sample from
ent each coil
Ash Content Major Measurem
ent
Dielectric Major Measurem 2 samples /
strength ent lot
5. Epoxy dotted Transit Major Visual 100 %
Kraft Damages &
Paper Packing
Condition
Dimensions Major Measurem 10 % of lot
ent
Density Major Measurem
ent Sample from
Tensile Strength Major Measurem each roll
ent
Elongation Major Measurem
ent
Moisture content Major Measurem
ent
Ash Content Major Measurem
ent
Dielectric Major Measurem 2 samples
strength ent /lot
Thickness of Major Measurem sample / lot
resin coating ent
6. Insulating Oil Appearance Measurem Sample from
Major ent each tanker
167
Density at 27°C Major Measurem -do-
ent
Viscosity at Major Measurem -do-
27°C ent
Interfacial Major Measurem -do-
Tension at 27°C ent
Flash Point Major Measurem -do-
ent
Pour Point Major Measurem -do-
ent
Total Acidity Major Measurem -do-
ent
Corrosion Major Test Sample from
Sulpher copper batch
strip.19 hrs @
140°C
BDV Major Measurem Sample from
ent tanker
Dielectric Major Measurem -do-
dissipation ent
factor @ 90°C
Specific Major Measurem -do-
resistance ent
a) at 27°C
b) at 90°C
Oxidation Major Measurem Sample from
stability ent each batch
Accelerated Major Test
aging test
168
SL. COMPONENT CHARACTERIS CLAS TYPE OF QUANTU REFERE ACCEPTAN FORMAT AGENCY REMARK
& TICS S M NCE CE OF S
NO CHECK OF DOCUME NORMS RECORD V P W H
OPERATIONS CHECK NT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Presence of Major Measurement Sample
oxidation from
inhibitor Each
tanker
Water content Major Measurement -do-
7. Insulating Finish Major Visual 10 % of
Press Appearance lot
Board Dimensions Major Measurement 10 % of
lot
Density Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Tensile Strength Major Measurement Sample
/lot
BDV Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Ash content Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Moisture content Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Conductivity of Major Measurement Sample
aqueous /lot
extracts
8. Perma Wood Finish Major Visual 10 % of
appearance lot
Dimensions Major Measurement 10 % of
lot
169
Electric Strength Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Density Major Measurement Sample
/lot
/lot
Cross breaking Major Measurement Sample
strength /lot
Impact strength Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Compressive Major Measurement Sample
strength /lot
Shear strength Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Moisture content Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Oil absorption Major Measurement Sample
/lot
9. Paper Covered Finish Major Visual 100 %
Conductor Appearance
Dimensions Major Measurement Sample/
bobbin
Resistivity Major Measurement Sample
/lot
/lot
Elongation Major Measurement Sample
/lot
Covering Major Measurement Each
Thickness bobbin
170
SL. COMPONENT CHARACTERIS CLAS TYPE OF QUANT REFER ACCEPTAN FORMAT AGENCY REMARK
& TICS S UM ENCE CE OF S
NO CHECK OF DOCU NORMS RECORD V P W H
OPERATIONS CHECK MENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
10. Enamel Finish Major Visual Sample
Covered Appearance / bobbin
Conductor Dimensions Major Measurement
Resistivity Major Measurement Sample
/lot
/lot
from
10% of
bobbins
Covering Major Measurement Sample
Thickness / bobbin
Flexibility Test Major Test Sample
Adherence Major Test from
Heat Shock Major Test 40% of
Hardness Major Measurement bobbins
Solvent Major Test Sample
Resistance /lot
BDV Major Measurement 40%
Cut-through Test Major Test Sample
/lot
11. MS material Finish Major Visual 100 %

Appearance
171
(Plates, Dimension Major Measurement 2 % of
lot
Flats, Angles & Hardness Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
channels) Chemical Major Measurement Sample
composition / lot
Tensile strength Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
Yield strength Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
/ lot
Bend test Major Test Sample
/ lot
12. Hard Ware Dimensions Major Measurement Samplin
g
Finish Major Visual Samplin
appearance g
13. Gaskets Finish Major Visual 5%
appearance
Dimensions Major Measurement 5%
Compressibility Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
/ lot
Recovery % Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
Oil immersion Major Measurement Sample
test / lot
Compression set Major Measurement Sample
% at 110°C / lot
Sl. COMPONENT CHARACTERIS CLAS TYPE OF QUANT REFER ACCEPTAN FORMAT AGENCY REMARK
& TICS S UM ENCE CE OF S
172
NO CHECK OF DOCU NORMS RECORD V P WH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
14. Bushing
a) Porcelain Finish Major Visual 100 %
appearance
Dimensions Major Measurement 10% of
lot
Power frequency Major Test 5 Nos /
withstand test lot
Porasity test Major Test 5 Nos /
lot
Temperature Major Test 5 Nos /
cycle test lot
b) Metal Parts Finish Major Visual 5% of lot
appearance
Dimensions Major Measurement 5% of lot
15. Plating/ Finish Major Visual 2% of lot
appearance
Galvanizing/ Thickness of Major Measurement 2% of lot
coating
Phosphating
16. Epoxy resin for Appearance Major Visual Sample
core / lot
binding Viscosity Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
17. Paints
a) Primer Appearance Major Visual 100 %
Shade Major Visual 100 %
b) Hot oil Viscosity Major Measurement Sample
resistance / lot
Paint Shade Major Visual 100 %
Scratch Major Test Sample
173
Hardness / lot
Drying time Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
c) Enamel Appearance Major Visual 100 %
Paint
Viscosity Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
Shade Major Visual 100 %
Drying time Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
Finish Major Visual 100 %
Scratch Major Test sample /
Hardness lot
Flexibility & Major Test Sample
adhesion / lot
d) Thermo Shade Major Visual 100%
setting
Powder Pencil Hardness Major Test Sample
Paint / lot
Cross Hatch Major Test Sample
Adhesion / lot
Curing Cycle Major Measurement Sample
/ lot
174
SL. COMPONENT CHARACTERIST CLAS TYPE OF QUAN REFERE ACCEPTAN FORMAT AGENCY REMARK
& ICS S TUM NCE CE OF S
NO CHECK OF DOCUME NORMS RECORD V P W H
OPERATIONS CHEC NT
K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
18. HV & LV Finish Major Visual 100%
appearance
connectors Dimensions Major Measurement 5 % of
lot
Tensile Strength Major Measurement 1 No /
lot
Chemical Major Test 1 No. /
Composition lot
19. Lightening Reference Major Test 100 %
arresters Voltage test
Lightening Major Test 100 %
Impulse Residual
Voltage Test
Partial Discharge Major Test 100 %
Test
Hermitical Major Test 100 %
Sealing Test
MANUFACTURING PROCESS &
ASSEMBLY:
1. Transformer Check of Raw Major Visual 100 %
tank & material
accessories Cutting of Major Measurement Sampli
material as per ng
given drawing
Finish Major Measurement Sampli
dimensions & ng
175
completeness as
per drawing
Finish of weld Major Visual Sampli
ng
Finish of material Major Visual 100 %
after gas cuting
and welding
Leak test Major Test 100 %
Vacuum test Major Test One /
Rating
/
Design
Surface finish Major Visual 100 %
prior to paint
application
Check of inside Major Visual 100 %
painting
Application of Major Visual 100 %
Primer coating
Application of first Major Visual 100 %
coat of paint
Application of Major Visual 100 %
finish coat of
paint
Paint thickness Major Measurement 100 %
176
SL. COMPONENT CHARACTERIST CLAS TYPE OF QUANTU REFE ACCEPTAN FORMAT AGENCY REMARK
& ICS S M RENC CE OF S
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Adhesion Major Test 10 %
Hardness Major Test 10 %
2. Frames & Check of raw Major Visual 100 %
Channels material
welding Dimensions Major Measurement Sampling
Weld finish Major Visual Sampling
Surface Major Visual 100%
Preperation
Painting Major Visual 100 %
3. Core
Assembly
a) Core Width Major Measurement Sampling
Cutting
Thickness Major Measurement Sampling
Length Major Measurement Sampling
Burr Major Measurement Sampling
Angle of Cutting Major Measurement Sampling
b) Core Temperature & Major Measurement Every
Anealing Speed one hour
c) Core Formation of core Major Measurement 100 %
assembly section
Core dia Major Measurement 100 %
Stack thickness Major Measurement 100 %
Leg length Major Measurement 100 %
Window width Major Measurement 100 %
177
Core weight Major Measurement 100 %
Binding of limbs Major Visual 100 %
Assembly of Major Visual 100 %
frame structure
Pre-Core Losses Major Measurement Sampling
4. Winding Conductor Size Major Measurement 100 %
Former diameter Major Measurement 100 %
Coil dimensions ( Major Measurement 100 %
ID, OD, AH, RD)
Insulation Major Visual 100 %
arrangement
Turns Major Visual 100 %
arrangement
Transposition Major Visual 100 %
SL. COMPONENT CHARACTERIST CLAS TYPE OF QUANTU REFER ACCEPTAN FORMAT AGENCY REMARK
& ICS S M ENCE CE OF S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Finishing and Major Visual 100 %
lead position
5. Insulation Dimensions Major Measurement Sampling
Components Finishing Major Visual 100 %
6. Core & Coil Dimensions Major Measurement 100 %
assembly Axial and Radial Major Measurement 100 %
Insulation
arrangement
Electrical Major Measurement 100 %
clearances
Yoke filling Major Visual 100 %
Position of lead Major Visual 100 %
178
out
HV & LV Major Visual 100 %
connections
Insulation and Major Visual 100 %
finishing of
brazed / crimped
joints
Ratio test Major Test 100 %
7. Drying of core Temperature Major Measurement 100 %
coil
assembly Time duration Major Measurement 100 %
Insulation Major Measurement 100 %
Resistance
8. Tanking & Oil Clamping of CCA Major Visual 100 %

filling under Job locking Major Mechanical 100 %
vacuum
Completeness Major Visual 100 %
Electrical Major Measurement 100 %
clearances
Breaker Major Visual 100 %
Operation
Vacuum Major Measurement 100 %
Oil temperature Major Measurement 100 %
Fixing of Major Visual 100 %
accessories &
fittings as per
drawing
Leak proofness Major Pressure test Sampling
179
180
NIGER
Sl. DELTA POWER
COMPONENT & HOLDING COMPANY
CHARACTERISTICS OF NIGERIA
CLASS PLC. QUANTUM
TYPE OF REFERENCE ACCEPTANCE FORMAT OF AGENCY REMARKS
OPERATIONS
N
DISTRIBUTION LINES AND SUBSTATIONS PROJECTSCHECK OF
CHECK
DOCUMENT NORMS RECORD V P W H
O for Proposal for EPC Contractors
Request
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
INSPECTION & TESTING
01 ROUTINE a. Windings Critical Measurement 100 % IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
. TESTS Resistance
b. Voltage Ratio & Critical Measurement 100 % IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
Voltage vector
Relationship
c. Load loss and Critical Measurement 100 % IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
Impedance Voltage
Measurement
d. No load loss & Critical Measurement 100 % IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
No load current
e. Neutral Current Critical Measurement 100 % IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
Measurement
f. Insulation resistance Critical Measurement 100 % IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
g. Induced over Critical Measurement 100 % IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
Voltage test
h. Separate source Volt Critical Measurement 100 % IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
age with stand
tests
i. Oil sample test Critical Measurement 1sample / IEC IEC TC 2 1
lot 60296(2003) 60296(2003)
j. Magnetic balance Critical Measurement Sampling IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 1 2 1
test
k. Breaker Critical Measurement 100 % TC 1 2 1
Coordination test
02 TYPE TESTS a. Short circuit test Critical Measurement One / Each IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 3 1 1
. Rating
b. Temperature rise Critical Measurement One / Each IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 2 1 1
test Rating
c. Lightning Impulse Critical Measurement One / Each IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 3 1 1
Voltage test Rating
d. Measurement of Critical Measurement One / Each IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 2 1 1
acoustic noise level Rating
e. Vacuum test Critical Measurement IEC 60071-2 IEC 60071-2 TC 2 1 1
f. Pressure test Critical Measurement IEC 60071-2 IEC 60071-2 TC 2 1 1
- do-
g. Measurement of zero Critical Measurement IEC 60076 IEC 60076
sequence impedance
h. Measurement of Critical Measurement IEC 60076 IEC 60076 TC 2 1 1
harmonics of No load
current
i. Oil samples (Post Critical Measurement 1 sample IEC IEC TC 2 1
short circuit & 60296(2003) 60296(2003) 181
temperature rise test)
182
7.6 HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM(HVDS)
7.6.1 Scope
This specification covers the installation of pole mounted Completely Self
Protected (CSP) Distribution Transformers and relevant switchgear for
High Voltage Distribution System (HVDS) and provision of service
connection to customers.
7.6.2 Applicable Standards
The relevant IEC Standards will generally apply. Any other standards shall be
approved by the Supervising Engineer.
7.6.3 Drawings and Equipment

All drawings relevant to the successful execution of this contract are attached in
this bidding document. The contractor shall submit all manufacturers’ drawings of
materials for approval before purchasing same.
Items to be supplied by the Contractor as well as those items to be provided by the
Employer for use by the Contractor are listed in Section IX of this bidding
document.
At the end of the contract, one soft copy on CD and five prints of all necessary
drawings shall be supplied by the contractor showing typical as built substation.
The dimensions of the drawings shall not exceed 60cm x 100cm.
All drawings shall bear the Employer’s name, drawing number, revision number,
scale and title approved by the Supervising Engineer/Consultant.
7.6.4 ERECTION OF 11kV OVERHEAD LINES
7.6.4.1 Scope
This specification covers the supply of line materials and actual erection of 11kV
overhead lines on reinforced concrete poles. The 11kV overhead lines shall be
single circuit type.
2.2 Conductors
The conductors shall be All Aluminium Conductor (AAC) and size in use shall be
150mm2.
Average span length using Aluminium conductors shall be 50m (165ft).
2.3 Clearance to buildings
Unless the conductors are fully insulated, the minimum clearance to buildings
shall be 3m. Where insulated conductors are used they shall be for complete spans
and not parts thereof. In this case, clearance to buildings shall not be less than
1.5m.
183
2.4 Joints
Mid-span conductor joints shall not be allowed. Clamps shall have the same
electrical conductivity and current carrying capacity or more than the equivalent
length of the conductors. For connecting different metals, bimetal connectors to
prevent electrolytic action shall be used.
2.5 Reinforced Concrete Poles
Pre-Stressed Reinforced H.T concrete poles shall be used throughout. A sketch

of the approved type of reinforced concrete poles complete with the cross arms is
shown in this bidding document.
The design of the line shall assume an average span of 50m between concrete
poles and sectionalised after every 10 spans. The section poles shall be of H -
Pole arrangement. H – Pole arrangement shall also be used for the purpose of
mounting 25kVA and 50kVA CSP Transformers. The method of mounting these
transformers is shown in the bid documents.
All erected H-Poles shall have the channel iron members adequately earthed.
The points of earthing connection shall be accessible for inspection. The
resistance of such earthing connections shall not be more than 2 ohms.
The HT concrete poles shall be pre-stressed during manufacture and shall be

10.36m minimum in height. The manufacturing process of the concrete poles shall
be approved by the Supervising Engineer and tests shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the Supervising Engineer.
A concrete foundation shall be provided for concrete poles erected. The design of
the foundation shall be as approved by the Supervising Engineer.
2.7 Cross arms
The Contractor shall supply and install Galvanized Angle Iron Cross arms and
shall be 6ft (1.82m) in length. Short spindles shall be fitted to give mean
conductor spacing of 76cm.
2.8 Stays
Stay wire shall be 25mm2 and of 700N/mm2 (45 tonne/in2) quality. Stay wire in
conjunction with 19mm (3/4’’) diameter stay rod shall be used. The minimum
angle between the stay and the pole shall be 30o. The size of baulks will not be
less than 70cm x 23cm x 13cm and shall be buried to a minimum depth of 2 m
(5ft). When excavating for the stay baulks the ground at the bottom of the hole
will be undercut so that the baulk pulls against the solid ground.
Stay may be made either by wrapping or by minimum of three admiral or bulldog

clamps. A galvanized thimble will be used in the eye of the stay. The stay rod
shall be fitted with adjusting device. The stay wire shall have insulator inserted at
about 3m above ground level.
184
Where Stay cannot be planted, struts as the same size as the pole shall be provided
with kicking block. Fly stay shall be used where stay or strut cannot be installed.
2.9 Insulators
11kV pin insulators of the porcelain type and porcelain disc insulators shall be
used.
2.10 Anti-Climbing Guards
These must be fitted in suitable positions where climbing is facilitated by virtue of

design, e.g.
(a) When two stays are sufficiently close to one another.
(b) H-Pole or multi-pole structures.
(c) All poles carrying transformers and distribution substation equipment.
2.11 Danger Plates
Conspicuous “DANGER” plates shall be provided and fixed on all poles at

approximately 2m above ground.
2.12 Route and Pole Number
These shall be printed on the pole immediately below the “DANGER” plate.
2.13 Earthing
(i) Steel works on poles shall be bonded to earth.
(ii) Copper wire of cross section not less than 70mm2 shall be used. The earth wire
shall be stapled to the support at intervals of not less than 30cm (12 inches).
Staples of non-ferrous metal shall be used.
The earth wire shall be protected from mechanical damage by PVC pipe for a
distance of 3m (10ft) above ground level and 15cm below ground level. In all
cases the value of earth resistance shall not exceed 2 Ohms, but in the case of
surge diverters, shall be less than 1 Ohm.
(iii) Where pole mounted switchgear is operated by mechanism at ground level, all
metal work shall be bonded together and connected to an earth mat so situated as
to include within its area the whole of the ground of which the operator would
normally stand. The earth mat shall be of copper wire of section not less than
25mm2.
3.0 ERECTION OF DISTRIBUTION SUBSTATIONS
3.1 General
185
Distribution Substations covered under the project scope of work shall be of two
types.
(a) 25kVA, 3-phase, 11kV/415V CSP transformers and shall be H-Pole mounted.
(b) 50kVA, 3-phase, 11kV/415V CSP transformers and shall be H-Pole mounted.
CSP transformers are manufactured complete with internal HV fuses and oil
immersed LV circuit breakers. Lightning arresters are mounted on the
transformers tanks. Therefore, separate lightning arresters and HV dropout fuses
would not be required at the substations.
3.2 Triple-Pole Air Break Switch
For 25kVA and 50kVA 3-phase transformers, 11kV, Triple-Pole Air Break (AB)
Switches shall be provided by the contractor and mounted as indicated in the bid
documents. An operating handle shall be fixed rigidly to the structure at 1.2m
height above ground level and bonded to the main earth.
3.3 Transformer Location
The distribution transformers shall be erected at the places specified by the

Supervising Engineer.
The transformer location shall be fixed, as practically as possible, close to the

center of the will be customer area to be supplied. However, due consideration
must be given to the proximity of buildings and the safety of the public.
3.4 Guidelines for erection of transformers
(i) All steel parts used on the structures, including bolts, nuts and washers shall
be hot dip galvanized conforming to international standards.
(ii) H-Pole arrangement other than section pole or terminal pole for mounting
transformers shall have one of the poles shorter than the pole carrying the
11kV conductor and placed at 0o to the line as indicated in drawing.
(iii)All electrical connections to the transformer shall be crimped with suitable
Aluminium alloy lugs and tightened using galvanized bolts and nuts with
galvanized washers.
(iv) Suitable Aluminium alloy line taps shall be used for HV connection to the
transformer HV bushings.
(v) All jumper connections from the line tap to the transformer bushing shall be
with 50mm2 AAC.
(vi)Low Tension (LT) 4-Core 50mm2 PVC Aluminium conductor shall be used
for connection between transformer LV terminals and LV Distribution Box.
(vii)H-Pole mounted substations shall be erected at 0o to the 11kV line except at

section and terminal poles where erection at 90o to the line will be permitted.
186
3.5 Method of erection
The method of installation of the CSP transformers on H-poles are depicted and
shown in drawings attached to this bidding document for guidance of the
Contractor.
The size of supports and structure of materials shown in the drawings are only
minimum sizes to be adopted. The contractor shall submit detailed drawings along
with the details of structure materials to be used for approval by the Employer.
3.6 Transformer earthing
The measured earthing resistance shall not be more that 2 (two) Ohms. If after
installation, the earth resistance is measured and found to be greater than 2
Ohms, the Contractor shall provide additional earth electrodes to bring the
earth resistance to below 2 Ohms without any additional cost to the Employer.
3.7 Installation of LV Distribution Box
The contractor shall supply and install Low Voltage LV Distribution Box.
The LV Distribution Box enclosure shall be robust, durable and secure, providing
all weather and vandal resistant protection. The enclosure shall be made of well-
finished 3mm sheet steel. It shall be zinc metal sprayed before being coated in
electrostatically charged paint and cured in an oven for a hard, high gloss finish.
It shall be suitable for outdoor pole-mounted installation in an ambient
temperature of 50oC and humidity of 95%. Insulated handles shall also be
provided to the LV Distribution Box. The Contractor shall submit the complete
drawings of the LV Distribution Box showing all internal arrangement. The Box
shall be lockable using an in-lock.
Suitable number of holes with cable glands along with approved gaskets shall be
provided in the lower compartment of the LV Distribution Box. Neoprene Rubber
gasket shall be used in the door to avoid ingress of moisture and other elements.
The LV Distribution Box shall conform to IP-54 degree of protection and shall
have painting as per relevant IEC Standards.
The incomer to the busbar (housed in the LV Distribution Box itself) shall be
terminated at the centre of the busbar. Provision shall be made for neutral
Grounding. The LV Distribution Box shall be suitably earthed in accordance with
relevant IEC Standards.
Wherever different metals are to be connected, bi-metallic connectors / washers

shall be used.
Insulated fuse holder for size NH00 fuses shall be provided for safe replacement
of fuses.
The LV Distribution Box shall be as specified in the table below:
187
TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE
LV DISTRIBUTION BOX
Item No. Description Unit Required Guaranteed
For 3-phase (25kVA & 50kVA)
Transformer
Manufacturer
1.0 Type
1.1 Model No.
1.2 Installation
1.3 Outdoor
Characteristics
2.0 Rated Voltage
2.1 Maximum Voltage V 415
2.2 No.of Phases V 500
2.3 Busbar Current 3 ph. + 1 N
2.4 Frequency A 100
2.5 Rated short circuit current Hz 50
2.6 Ambient temperature kA 8 for 3 secs
o
2.7 Humidity C 50
2.8 Fuse base % 95
2.9 Outgoing terminals for AB No. 4
3.0 Cable No. 3
3.1 Busbar type Aluminium
3.2 Busbar dimension – Thick mm 3.0
Width cm 2.5
Length cm 32.0
3.3 Termination on Busbar Cable lugs
3.8 Fuses
Fuses shall be suitable for fixing on DIN fuse base mounted in LV distribution
boxes and as specified in the table below.

FUSES
1.0 Manufacturer
1.1 Type HRC
1.2 Model No.
1.3 Installation Outdoor
1.4 Size NH00
1.5 Application General
purpose
2.0 Characteristics
2.1 Maximum Voltage V
2.2 Rated short circuit current for 3 KA 500
2.3 secs Hz 8
o
2.4 Frequency C 50
2.5 Ambient temperature % 50
2.6 Humidity A 95
Fuse rating - for 50kVA A 40
- for 25kVA 25
188
3.9 Pre-Commissioning Test of Distribution Substations
The following tests shall be conducted before commissioning each distribution

substation:
(a) Testing of Transformer
(i) Measurement and recording of transformer Winding Resistance

(ii) Measurement and recording of transformer Insulation Resistance
(iii) Measurement and recording of transformer Turns Ratio.
(b) Testing of 11kV Line
All sections of 11kV line relevant to the substation being tested in (a) shall be
tested with High Voltage Test equipment.
(c) Earth Resistance Test
Before commissioning any distribution substation, earth resistance

measurement must be carried out with the appropriate instrument.
Resistances between zero and two (2) Ohm shall be regarded as normal.
If such resistance exceeds two Ohm, the substation should not be
commissioned until the resistance has been reduced to two Ohms or less.
Special cases of high resistance should be reported to the Supervising
Engineer/Consultant.
3.10 Commissioning of Distribution Substations
After conducting all the tests set out in 3.7 above in the presence of and to the
complete satisfaction of the Supervising Engineer and in accordance with the
relevant specifications, the substations shall be commissioned before handing
over to the Employer.
4.0 CONNECTION OF LT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLES
The services to be realized from each transformer should be such that all
customers are served from the pole on which the transformer is mounted.
However, a maximum of one pole on either side of the transformer pole can be
used for the service connections. In this case, the LT line from the transformer
will be Aerial Bunched Cable to the other poles so as to avoid possibilities of
illegal tapping.
The contractor shall provide appropriate LV conductors for erection.
4.1 Support for Aerial Bunched (AB) Cables
AB Cables shall be held in position using approved suspension clamps with Eye
Hooks as shown in drawing no. DT-04-1. Details are shown in drawing no. DT-
04-2.
189
Suspension clamps shall have the following requirements:
(i) Suspension clamps shall be made of Aluminium Alloy of tensile strength

greater than 200N/mm2 (20.5 kgf/mm2) and shall be capable of holding
Aluminium alloy messenger wire of 5.8mm or 6.8mm compacted diameter.
The eye hooks shall be made of forged steel or mild steel.
(ii) The clamp shall be provided with black weather-resistant plastic coating of at
least 1mm thickness to prevent the insulation of the phase conductors from
chafing due to rubbing against the clamp.
(iii) Suspension clamp assembly shall provide sufficient flexibility to allow free
movement of the clamp at either straight runs or angle locations.
5.0 CUSTOMER’S SERVICES
Existing customer service wires shall be utilized for connections from LV

Distribution Boxes to customer premises. Where the existing service wires are
damaged or inadequate in length, the Contractor shall replace them with 16mm2
PVC covered Aluminum conductor when authorized by the Supervising Engineer.
The maximum length of LV distribution lines must be limited such that a phase to
neutral fault at the most remote end of the line (including service line) will result
in sufficient current flow to operate the transformer LV circuit breaker. The
Supervising Engineer/ Consultant shall define the minimum tripping current.
6.0 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE WIRE AND ENERGY METERS
The Contractor shall supply and install the customer service wires where they are
not existing and terminate same at the customers Metering point. The installation
of the energy meters shall be the responsibility of the Employer.
The Contractor shall liaise with the Supervising Engineer before commencing
installation.
7.0 WORK PLAN
The Contractor shall submit detailed work plan for approval by the Engineer. The
work plan shall contain strategies for minimizing prolonged outages to customers
such that supply could be restored when work is suspended especially at night.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for clearing and cleaning of site after
completion of the works.
190
ANNEXURE I
11kV AIR BREAK SWITCHES
1. SCOPE
This specification covers 11kV, 50Hz Three Pole Air Break Switches complete
with operating mechanism for outdoor installation. The switches shall be suitable
for operation under off-load conditions only and are intended for use on Three-
Phase Distribution Sub-stations.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARD
Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification, the AB switches shall generally
conform to the relevant IEC Standards.
3. CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
The AB Switch shall be of three-pole construction and shall be suitable for
horizontal or vertical mounting as required by the Engineer. The switch shall have
two 11kV post insulators per phase suitably mounted on angle irons to enable easy
movement of insulators. The angles shall be mounted on a steel frame made of two
angle/channel supports. The switch shall be manually operated with a rocking type
arrangement through a 30mm2 Galvanized Iron coupling rod.
All current carrying parts shall be made of silver or nickle-plated 90% electrolytic
copper. The arcing horns shall be made of phosphor bronze and shall have spring-
assisted operation. The switch shall have a spring mechanism so as to ensure that
the speed of opening of contacts is independent of the speed of manual operation.
The spacing between the phases shall be adjustable between 600mm to 760mm.
Total length of the square beam/base frame shall be kept as 2650mm. The switch
assembly shall be suitable for mounting on a H-pole structure with centre-to-centre
distance between poles up to 2440mm. Length of the operating tube shall vary from
4800mm to 6000mm depending upon the mounting position of the switch on the
structure (exact length to be specified by the Engineer).
The switch shall be provided with bimetallic connectors on the incoming side to
accommodate Aluminium conductors of sizes 20, 30 and 50mm2. On the outgoing
side, about 1 metre long flexible coil type cable jumper of not less than 50mm2
Aluminium section shall be provided. All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanized
accordance with IEC Standard.
Typical constructional details of the AB Switch are shown in the relevant drawing.
4. TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE
191
Bidders shall fill in the Guaranteed portion against each item specified in the
schedule below.

11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH
1.0 Manufacturer
1.1 Type
1.2 Model No.
1.3 Installation Outdoor
1.4 No. of Poles Three Pole
2.0 Characteristics
2.1 Rated Voltage kV 11
2.2 Maximum Voltage kV 12
2.3 Rated Nominal Current A 400
2.4 Rated Current Rated Lightning Impulse
Withstand Voltage
i. To earth and between poles kV 75
ii. Across the terminals of open kV 85
switch
2.5 Rated One-Minute Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage
i. To earth and between poles kV 28
ii. Across the terminals of open kV 32
switch
2.6 Ambient Temperature o
C 50
2.7 Humidity
% 95
2.8 Temperature Rise
i Copper contacts (Silverfaced) in air o
C 65
ii Terminals of the switch intended
to be connected to external o
C 50
conductors by bolts
2.9 Rated Short Time Current kA 40

3.0 Rated Peak Withstand Current A 10
3.1 Rated Mainly Active Load Breaking
Capacity A rms 6.3
3.2 Rated Transformer Off-Load Breaking
Capacity
Rated Line Charging Breaking Capacity
3.3 A rms 2.5
Rated Cable Charging Breaking Capacity
3.4 A rms 10
192
5. TYPE TESTS
The AB Switch shall be subjected to the following type tests in accordance with
IEC Standard.
i) Dielectric test (impulse and one minute wet power frequency withstand voltage
tests)
ii) Temperature rise test (for contacts and terminals)
iii) Short time current and peak withstand current tests
iv) Mainly active load breaking capacity test
v) Transformer off-load breaking capacity test
vi) Line charging breaking capacity test
vii) Cable charging breaking capacity test
viii) Operation and Mechanical Endurance test
6. ROUTINE TESTS
The AB Switches shall be subjected to the following routine tests:
i) Power frequency voltage dry test
ii) Measurement of the resistance of main circuit
iii) Operating test
7. INSPECTION
All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless
otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of
purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser
all reasonable facilities without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with this specification.
The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at his own cost by an
independent agency whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of supply.
193
DRAWING NO. DT - 06
194
7.6 LT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE
7.6.1 SCOPE:
This specification covers the requirements of High density Polyethylene

insulated (HDPE) Aluminium Cables twisted over a central bare Aluminium
alloy messenger wire (along with associated accessories) for use on LT
overhead lines in Rural/Urban Electrification System.
The designation of the LT AB Cables are:
3 Core x 16+25 Sq.mm
The first part of the designation refers to the number and size (nominal cross
sectional area) of the phase conductor and the last part to size of the bare
AAA messenger.
7.6.1.1 LT Aerial Bunched Cables:
Electrical Data:
The rated voltage of the cables shall be 0.6/1kV.

Highest system voltage: 1.2 kV.
Test Voltage: a) 2.5 kV/50 Hz / 5 min for routine tests
b) 4 kV/ 50 Hz / 4 Hrs. for type tests.
Max short circuit current for 1 Sec. 1.0 KA.
Current carrying capacity at different ambient air temperatures of different
sizes of phase conductors are tabulated at Annexure – III.
7.6.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification the following standards as amended

from time to tome shall be applicable.
i) IS: 8130-1984 for Aluminium conductors for insulated electric cables.

ii) IS: 6474-1984 Polyethylene insulation for cables for voltages up to and
including 1100 V with latest amendments thereof.
iii) IS: 398 (Part-IV) 1994: For all Aluminium Alloy Conductors (AAC) for overhead
transmission purposes.
A.B. Cable meeting any other alternative equivalent international standards ensuring
equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above and complying with this
technical specification shall also be acceptable. In case the tenders wish to offer
materials conforming to other standards a copy of such standard (English version
only) adopted shall invariably be enclosed to the bid.
7.6.2.1 GENERAL:
195
The insulated phase conductors shall be twisted around the bare aluminium alloy
messenger wire, which shall take all the mechanical stress. The messenger wire
shall also serve as the earth-cum-neutral wire.
7.6.3 PHASE CONDUCTORS:
The 16 Sq.mm phase conductor shall be of Aluminium solid round, 25 Sq.mm

messenger wire shall be round stranded and suitably compacted and outer diameter
shall be within the limits specified in Annexure- I.
The phase conductors shall be insulated with black weather resistant High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) suitable to 1100 V insulation. The insulated conductors shall
generally conform to the standards (i) & (ii) quoted in clause 2.2 above.
7.6.3.1 CONDUCTORS:
The properties of the Aluminium wires before stranding shall be as below.
Tensile strength not less than 90 N/mm2
Resistivity at 20 Deg. C not exceeding 0.02845 Ohm per meter.
The outer layer in standard conductor shall have a right handed direction of lay (Z),
the surface of the conductors shall be smooth.
7.6.3.2 INSULATION
Material:
The insulation shall be black weather – resistant special high-density
polyethylene.
Phase Identification:
Durable and clearly visible longitudinal ridges shall be provided as follows on
each insulated conductors as indicated in Figure-5 for identification phases.
For 3 Core Cable 1,2,3
Approx. ridge dimensions are:

- Width = 1.00 mm
- Height = 0.4 mm
- Distance between
consecutive ridges = 2.7 mm
7.6.4 MESSENGER (NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR):
The messenger shall be an All Aluminium Alloy conductor composed of 7 wires

each 2.34 mm Dia drawn from rod, which is manufactured in a continuous casting
and rolling procedure. The properties for the individual wires before stranding
shall be.
- Tensile strength not less than 294 N/mm2

- Elongation on 200 mm not less than 4%
- Resistivity at 20 Deg. C not exceeding 0.0328 ohm Sq.mm/m
196
- Density at 20 Deg. C 2.7 Kg/cubic –dm.
No joints are allowed in the messenger except those made on the base rod or
wire before final drawing. The messenger shall be round, stranded and
compacted to have smooth round surface.
The messenger takes all the mechanical stress and also serves as neutral
conductor.
- Neutral conductor over all dia (max) 6.5 m

- D.C resistance at 20 Deg. C (max) 1.38 mm ohms/km
- Min. breaking load 7.4 KN
7.6.4.1 DESIGN:
The cable consists of one to three black weather resistant special high density
polyethylene (HDPE) insulated aluminium phase conductor’s stranded around a
bare all aluminium alloy messenger which is also the neutral conductor. The
construction data are specified in Annexure-I.
The resistance of the phase conductors and the messenger are determined with
direct current and the same are corrected to 20 Deg. C using the formula and co-
efficient given in clause-5 of the standard IEC 2.8 B. The values obtained shall
not exceed the resistance given in Annexure-2.
7.6.4.2 POLYTHYLENE INSULATION:
The polyethylene insulation shall generally conform to IS-6474/1984. The

following properties shall be guaranteed by the supplier. For methods of testing
IS: 10810 (relevant parts) may be referred.
Density of HDPE (ST 4) = 0.95 to 0.96 g/cu.cm

Melt flow index Max. = 3.0
Tensile strength = Not less than 10
N/Sq.mm
Percentage elongation = Not less than 300
Carbon Black content = Between 2% and 3%
Vicat softening point = Not less than 85
Deg. C.
Volume Resistivity of
Insulation
At 27 Deg. C. = 1 X 10 15 ohm cm
(min)
At 70 Deg. C. = 1 X 10 13 ohm cm
(min)
Environmental stress = No cracks shall be

visible to the naked
eye
Shrinkage at 115 Deg.C = 3%

24 Hrs. Max.
197
7.6.5 TESTS ON LT AB CABLE:
7.6.5.1 Type Tests:
Electrical Tests:
a) High Voltage test including water immersion test (IS: 1596)
b) High Voltage test at room temperature
c) Measurement of resistance of phase conductor and messenger wire.
Mechanical Tests:
d) Physical tests for polyethylene insulation.
(i) Ageing in air oven
(ii) Shrinkage test
(iii) Hot deformation
(iv) Loss of mass in air oven
(v) Heat shock test
(vi) Thermal stability
e) Test for bleeding and blooming of pigments

f) Flammability test
g) Bending test on complete cable
h) Tensile strength of messenger wire
7.6.5.2 ACCEPTABLE / ROUTINE TESTS:
a) High Voltage test including water immersion test (IS: 1596)

b) High Voltage test at room temperature
c) Visual examination and verification of 10% lengths of the lot offered.
d) Dimension verification of phase conductor messenger wire and
insulation as per Annexure – I.
e) Resistance measurement of conductor and messenger wire.
f) Elongation test on phase conductor and messenger wire
g) Elongation on HDPE insulation
h) Break load on messenger wire
7.6.5.3 BENDING TEST ON THE COMPELTE CABLE
The test shall be performed on a sample of complete cable. The sample shall be
bent around a test mandrel at room temperature for at least one complete turn. It
shall then be unwound and the process shall be repeated after turning the sample
around its axis 180 Deg. The cycle of these operations shall then be repeated
more. The diameter of the mandrel shall be 10 (D+d).
Where D = actual diameter of the cable (i.e., minimum circumscribing circle

diameter in mm) d = actual diameter of the conductor in mm. No cracks visible to
the naked eye are allowed.
7.6.6 PACKING AND MARKING
The Cable shall be wound on non-returnable wooden drums conforming to IS:

10418/1982 with latest amendment thereof. The ends of the cable shall be sealed
by means of non-hygroscopic sealing materials. The drum shall be marked with
the following.
198
a. Manufacturer’s Name or Trade Mark
b. Type of cable and voltage grade
c. Drum number or identification number
d. Number of cores and size of cable
e. Number and length of pieces of cable in each drum
f. Gross / Net mass of the cable
g. Direction of rotation of drum (By means of an arrow)
The drums shall be of such construction as to assure delivery of conductor in the

Field free from displacement and damaged and should be able to withstand all
stresses due to handling and the stringing operation so that cable surface is not
dented, scratched or damaged in any way during transport and erection. The
cable shall be properly lagged on the drums.
The cable drum should be suitable for wheel mounting.
The mass of finished cable in a drum (without mass of drum) of various

designations shall not exceed by more than 10% of the following values.
Designation Gross mass
3 x 16+25 Sq.mm 800 Kg
The min. length of each cable shall be 1 Km.
While longer length shall be acceptable, shorter lengths not less than 500 Mtrs. shall
be acceptable to the extent of 10% of the size wise ordered quantity only.
7.6.6.1 MARKING OF CABLE
All the cables shall have the following marking embossed on the insulated phase
conductors for identification: APCPDCL, in addition to manufacturer’s name and
year of manufacture at regular intervals of not more than one meter.
ANNEXURE-I
CONSTRUCTIONAL DATA AND DIMENSIONS OF
LT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLES
No & X- Phase Conductor Messenger

sectional Number & Dia. Of Insulati Overall Dia. Of Tensile
area of Sectional Uninsula on Dia. Of Uninsulat Strength
conductor Area ted thickne Conduct ed Cond. (approx)
Conduct ss in or
or
Max.
Sq. Mm Sq.mm mm mm Max. mm Min. Kg
Mm
3x16+25 3x16 4.5 1.0 6.5 6.0 7.4
199
ANNEXTURE-II
D.C. RESISTANCE AND INSULATION OF
LT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE
Nominal X- No of Strands DC Resistance at 20O C Insulation

sectional area of Ohm/km/max. thickness
conductors Average min.
Mm
16 Aluminium 1 1.910 - 1.0
25 Alum. Alloy 7 - 1.38 Bare
Note:
1. The average value of the thickness of the insulation shall not be less than the
specified average value
2. The thickness at any place may be less than the specified average value, provided
that the difference does not exceed 0.1 mm + 102 of the specified average value.
3. For thickness of insulation six measurements are made radially on a piece of
insulation, as far as possible equally spaced around the circumference but not on the
ridges
ANNEXURE-III
APPROX.CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY (in Amps) OF PHASE

CONDUCTORS AT DIFFERENT AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURES.
No & area 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25 +30 +35 +40 +45 +50 +55 +60
of Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg Deg Deg Deg Deg Deg Deg Deg Deg Deg
Conductors C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY IN AMPERES
3x16+25 99 96 93 89 85 81 77 73 69 64 58 52 44
Sq. Mm
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR LT. AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE
Sl. Particulars 3 x 16 + 25
No. Sq.mm
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Applicable standard/specification
3. Type of Cable (construction to be described)
4. Size of Cable
5. Phase Conductor – A1 Portion
i) Material of conductor
ii) Applicable standard
iii) No. of strands
iv) Nominal diameter of strand (mm)
v) Max. diameter of bare conductor (mm)
vi) Nominal area of cross-section of bare
conductor (Sq.mm)
200
vii) Lay ratio.
viii) Elongation (%)
ix) Tensile strength (min)/breaking load (KN)
6. Phase conductors – Insulation portion
i) Material of insulation
ii) Insulation thickness (mm)
iii) Diameter of insulated conductor (mm)
iv) Whether the insulation conforms to the
standards specified in the technical
specification
7. Messenger/neutral conductor – AAA portion
i) Material of conductor
ii) Applicable standard
iii) Number of strands
iv) Nominal diameter of strand (mm)
v) Max. diameter of bare conductor(mm)
vi) Nominal area of cross-section of bare
conductor (Sq.mm)
vii) Lay ratio
viii) Elongation (%)
ix) Tensile strength (min)/breaking load (KN)
8. Complete AB Cable
i) Overall diameter (mm)
ii) Total weight (kg/km)
iii) Standard drum length offered (mtrs) and
tolerance
iv) Gross weight of the cable drum
v) Code or method of cable identification
9. Electrical Data:
i) Max. DC resistance of the phase conductor
at 20 C
ii) Max. DC resistance of the neutral conductor
at 20 C
iii) AC resistance at – 75 Deg. C phase
conductor (ohms/km)
iv) AC resistance at – 75 Deg C
messenger/neutral conductor (ohms/km)
v) Approx. inductive reactance at 50 Hz. phase
conductor (ohms/km)
vi) Approx. inductive reactance at 50 Hz.
Messenger/neutral conductor (ohms/km)
vii) Approx. zero sequence reactance at 50 Hz.
per phase (ohms/km)
viii) Short circuit current for 1 sec. Max (KA)
ix) Current carrying capacity (amps) at various
ambient temp. deg. of 0 C, 10 C, 20 C, 30 C,
40 C & 50 C
10. Specification climatic conditions to which AB
Cable are manufactured
a) Max. Solar radiation (w/sq.m)
b) Min. wind velocity (m/sec.)
11. Tests
i) Details of type tests and factory tests
conducted on each size of AB Cable
201
ii) Whether one complete set of test certificates
thereof are enclosed to the bid
12. BENDING RADIUS OF CABLE:
13. Any other relevant technical information the
bidder may desire to furnish in respect of the
LT
i) AB Cable.
202
7.7 SPECIFICATION OF CIVIL WORKS
Generally, the construction of the control building, cable trenches,

foundations and other structures shall display the highest level of
workmanship and the entire substation complex layout built to enhance
maximum safety for the operating staff.
7.7.1 DESIGN PRINCIPLES AND STANDARDS

The design, equipment, materials and workmanship shall comply with and be
tested in accordance with the approved principles of civil engineering,
represented by relevant well-known international standards.
If the proposed standards are unknown to either the Employer or the Engineer,
they are entitled to request the supply of copies of the chosen standard(s).
DIN or BS Standards relevant for this project are:
The appropriate DIN Standard for soil testing.
DIN 488 or BS 4482, 4466, 4102, 4449, 4461, 1317 Reinforcing Steel.
DIN 1045 or BS CP 114 Reinforced concrete structures; design and
construction.
DIN 1048 or BS 4408 Concrete testing.
DIN 1050 or BS 4133, 4186, 4122, 4848, 449 Steel super structures.
DIN 1054 or CP 2004 Foundations.
DIN 1055 or CP3 V Design loads.
DIN 1084 or CP 110 Part I Procedural control for concrete and reinforced
concrete construction.
DIN 1164 or BS 4248, 915 Cement.
DIN 4030 Valuation of water, soils and gas aggressive to concrete.
DIN 4100 or BS 4129, 4165,4360, 4372, 4870,4871, 449 Welded steel super
structures.
DIN 4114 or CP3 Chapter ix Stability of steel structures.
DIN 4226 or BS 882, 1198, 1199, 1200 Sand and gravel for concrete.
DIN or BS CP3 Chapter II for Thermal insulation.
DIN appropriate standard for soil investigation.
203
The Contractor is responsible for the observance of all relevant safety
regulations and for the supply, erection, maintenance and permanent
supervision of all necessary safety installations.
Statics and drawings as follows are subject to approval:

- statics of all supporting structures (steel structures, reinforced concrete,
concrete masonry), including all fixings.
- drawings of steel structures (including workshop drawings and bills of
materials).
- formwork drawings.
- reinforcement drawings.
- reinforcement bending schedules.
The soil bearing capacity on which the statics and the design are based shall be
proved by soil tests. The Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer of the
execution of soil tests in due time before starting.
7.7.1.1 Factors of Safety

If the calculations are not based on admissible pressures for all kinds of material
or on DIN 1045 or equivalent international standard for reinforced concrete
structures, the following factors of safety have to be kept in all cases:
Structure Factor of Safety
Normal condition Broken Wire

Condition
Concrete, reinforced concrete 2.5 2.0

Steel parts 2.3 1.7
Insulators 2.5 -
Details and fastening shall be designed to have a factor of safety against failure
not less than the main members of the structure.
7.7.1.2 Installation, Furnishings and Excavation of the Site (temporary

works)
204
All temporary works required for any purpose whatsoever, whether associated
with the works or otherwise, shall be constructed, maintained and finally
removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Working drawings of all major temporary works shall be submitted to the

Engineer and simultaneously to the Engineer's representative for consideration
in adequate time before erection or manufacture is due to begin. This
requirement will be relaxed in cases of emergency only; but in such event,
emergency temporary works shall be designed and erected in conjunction with
the Engineer and/or the Engineer's representative.
Materials used in temporary works shall not be incorporated in the works without
the express approval in writing of the Engineer. Where such approval is given,
the materials shall be in first class condition and shall, at the Contractor's
expense, be cleaned and painted or otherwise incorporated in the works.
No approval given under this clause will relieve the Contractor of any of his
contractual obligations.
The supply and distribution of electricity and water shall be executed by the
Contractor according to his own needs. Such facilities shall be made available
to the Engineer's house until connection of site to the national grid.
Upon completion of the construction works, roads, trenches, fences, etc, which
are not in line with the approved design shall be returned to their original state.
This site and the area around the site shall be cleaned of all kind of building
material, waste, etc.
7.7.2 EARTH WORKS

7.7.2.1 Excavation
Before starting work, the Contractor shall obtain full information from the
component authorities on the exact location of the Substation perimeter area
and all existing obstacles (cables, water pipes, etc). Any damages arising from
levelling works, from the excavation of the foundation pits, etc, will have to be
repaired at the Contractor's own expense. The contract price includes the
removal of obstacles, if requested by the Engineer. Before starting and after
205
completion of the levelling works, the Contractor shall perform a topographical
survey in the presence of the Engineer.
Excavation of all materials to be taken out can be by whatever means

necessary, accurately to the Lines and levels shown on the drawings or is
ordered by the Engineer. Slopes and formation surfaces shall be trimmed true
to the required profiles. Back-fill material must be approved by the Engineer.
Unsuitable or surplus material shall be deposited on approved sites of the works.

The Contractor shall be responsible for locating such sites and shall control,
spread and grade the spoil tips to the requirements of the Engineer's
representative.
All excavation beyond the contract limits as shown on the drawings or the limits
otherwise ordered by the Engineer shall be made good with "concrete B 5" or
with approved material from excavations as ordered by the Engineer. Such
works will not be measured for payment. Unsuitable material at formation level
shall be removed and similarly made good. The excavation and concrete shall
be paid for in such cases.
Concrete foundations shall be placed on natural soil or lean concrete B 5 only.

Whenever necessary, excavation shall be properly timbered. If ordered by the
Engineer or the Engineer's representative in the interests of safety, any
previously unsupported excavation shall also be adequately timbered. The
design and construction of timbering shall in all cases be subject to the approval
of the Engineer; and for major excavations, drawings, details and statistic
calculations shall be submitted as specified for major temporary works.
Except where works are permitted to be constructed "in the wet", the Contractor
shall provide, construct, maintain and operate sufficient pumps and piping,
walls, sumps and the like to keep the work free from all water whatsoever
source arising for as long a period as shall be ordered by the Engineer. Such a
period will not be unreasonably extended and will be determined solely by
engineering considerations relative to the affected work or site.
206
Where the initial removal of water leaves formation surfaces soaked or
otherwise unsuitable, the Engineer's representative may order them to be
excavated down to sound surfaces and then to be sealed with 'concrete B 5".
All necessary works and material which might be used for any timbering or
dewatering systems shall not be charged extra. These costs shall be included in
the bid price of the earth works.
7.7.2.2 Back-filling
All materials for filling shall be hard, predominantly granulate, reasonably clean,
non-combustible, free from all matter liable to decomposition and with less than
approximately 10% silt, dust or like impurities. The material shall not be liable to
disintegration or excessive settlement in the future and shall be capable of
compaction without the aid of weather and time. It may be obtained from
excavations or other sources and shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
In general, filling shall be deposited in layers between 20 and 30 cm thick, and

each layer shall be compacted by vibrating rollers and/or the passage of
vibrating plates over the entire area to ensure uniform compaction. Before being
used as fill, boulders and large pieces of material must be broken down to
prevent the formation of voids, and each layer deposited must include sufficient
small, hard stuff to ensure that all interstices are filled. Whenever ordered, the
layers shall be watered to achieve maximum compaction according to Standard
of Proctor (95%). Alternatively the compaction can be checked by the
Kunzelrod-test according DIN 4094. The compacted soil shall resist at least 3
blows per 10 cm.
Kunzel test rod equipment or equivalent shall be available at each site.

Embankments shall be formed where shown on the drawings, and the surfaces
thereof shall be trimmed and graded to the lines and levels described or
otherwise ordered by the Engineer.
Where roads or other structures are to be constructed on fill, formation surfaces

shall be rolled by an approved weight and type of roller to the required falls and
cambers.
207
Trenches for pipes, culverts, cables, mains and the like shall be refilled in the
following manner:
Above any sand bed or from trench formation level to a height of 40 cm above
pipes, cables, etc., the fill shall be deposited through a grid of approved mesh
size placed over the trench to trench to prevent builders, etc. from damaging the
pipes or cables. This layer shall be hand-packed and tamped to ensure
thorough compaction around the pipes, etc. (Where pipes are surrounded with
concrete this operation may be omitted). Thereafter, the trenches shall be filled
in layers between maximum 30 to 40 cm thick, mechanically rammed and
compacted to 97% of proper density. Any damage to pipes, etc, resulting from
these operations, shall be remedied at the Contractor's expense.
Where trenches pass under roads or structures, they shall be back-filled as far in
advance as practicable of the construction of the surface works and any
settlement made good before such works are begun.
7.7.3 CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS

7.7.3.1 General
The Contractor is responsible for the observance of all relevant safety
regulations and for the supply, erection, maintenance and permanent
supervision of all necessary safety installations.
The Contractor has to supply statics and drawings for the reinforced concrete
construction which are subject to approval by the Engineer. The following
statics and drawings are subject to approval and are included in the bid prices:
- statics of all supporting structures (steel structure, reinforced concrete,
concrete, masonry);
- drawings of steel structure (including workshop drawings);
- formwork drawings;
- reinforcement drawings;
- reinforcement bending schedules.
Concrete and other material qualities shall be indicated on all drawings.
208
Cost for the testing of all types of material shall be included in the bid price. The
test frequency for the concrete cube compressive strength shall correspond to
DIN 1045 (German) or equivalent international standards. The results of each
test shall be immediately submitted to the Engineer.
Two (2) sets of test cubes (i.e. 6 cubes), slump test, sieve analysis test
equipment and sedimentation test cylinder shall be available at each site. Test
equipment for cubes and hallow blocks shall be available at site or at least in the
respective town area.
The Contractor shall keep a job record with the daily documentation of all
construction activities.
A double insulation coating of well-coating and viscous quality made of Bitumen

or equivalent shall be applied for all structure parts with earth contact. Insulation
against rising soil moisture and against ground water pressure has to be
arranged where necessary.
7.7.3.2 Cement
Cement shall comply with the German DIN Standard 1164 or equivalent
international standard for ordinary and rapid hardening Portland cement.
Cement may be delivered to the site in drums or bags. Each container shall be
marked with the manufacturer's name and consignment number for identification
on site. The Contractor shall supply a manufacturer's test certificate relative to
each consignment and also a statement of the quantity, packing and shipping
details of each consignment.
Cement accepted for the site stores shall be in first class condition and facilities
shall be provided to the Engineer's representative to enable him check the
condition of all newly delivered cement. He shall also be provided with similar
facilities to check cement at any time during its storage and use on site. All
cement which does not comply with the specification shall be immediately
removed from the works.
209
Cement shall be stored clear of the ground in weather-proof sheds, and each
consignment shall be kept separate and as far as possible used in the order of
delivery. Different types of cement shall be kept separate.
7.7.3.3 Cement - Lime Mortar

Cement lime mortar shall be composed of cement, hydrated lime, non-hydraulic
or semi-hydraulic type, and natural sand or crushed natural stone sand or a
combination of both as specified for cement mortar.
7.7.3.4 Cement Mortar and Grout

Cement mortar shall be composed of cement and natural sand or crushed
natural stone sand or a combination of both in accordance with DIN 1045 or
equivalent international standard. Grout or screed shall be mixed as for cement
mortar and shall be of a consistency which shall allow all cavities, etc. to be
completely filled.
Cement mortar and grout shall be mixed in small quantities only as and when
required; and any mortar or grout which has begun to set or which has been
mixed for a period of more than one hour will be rejected and shall be discarded.
7.7.4 CONCRETE
7.7.4.1 Concrete - Admixtures
Approved admixtures shall be used where required to produce special wearing
qualities or appearance. The use of admixtures to assist workability or for other
purposes will be considered provided that tests demonstrate that all air-
entrainment can be eliminated and that the admixture are not harmful to
reinforcement and finishes.
7.7.4.2 Concrete Aggregates

Aggregates for concrete shall consist of approved naturally occurring local
material complying as nearly as possible with the requirements of DIN 4226 or
equivalent international standards.
210
Fine aggregates from salt water sources will only be permitted for unreinforced
concrete where possible subsequent efflorescence can be accepted.
The Contractor shall supply such samples of aggregates as are required for test
purposes and the preparation of the trial concrete mixed specified herein.
Whenever required by the Engineer's representative, aggregates shall be hosed

down to restore the specified standard or cleanliness.
Aggregates shall be stored in bins with clean hard floors. The bin floors shall be
constructed so as to permit free drainage of moisture from the aggregates.
At least 3 sized of aggregates shall be stored separately.
7.7.4.3 Concrete Botching and Mixing

Except for mass concrete filling, blinding layers, pipe surrounds and small
isolated amounts of minor works, all concrete materials shall be batch-weighed
by approved machines. Allowance shall be made throughout for the moisture
content of the aggregates. A simple device for adjusting the amount of added
water shall be incorporated in the botching/mixing plant.
7.7.4.4 Concrete Blinding Levers

Formation surfaces shall be sealed with a blinding layer of B 5, 5 cm in thickness
were shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer's representative.
In general, blinding layers will be required under all reinforced concrete

foundations.
7.7.4.5 Concrete Conveying, depositing and Compaction

All concrete shall be conveyed by approved means, such as metal skips,
barrows, dumpers or pipelines. All concrete shall be placed and compacted
within 30 minutes of mixing.
Concrete shall be deposited evenly in layers according to DIN 1045 or

equivalent international standard. All concrete for reinforced work shall be
compacted by approved pattern mechanical vibrators of the immersion type.
Sufficient vibrators shall be employed to ensure complete compaction at a
211
speed commensurate with the supply of concrete from the mixers. Vibrators
shall not be attached to nor be allowed to come into contact with the
reinforcement. Vibration shall be continued until all air has been released from
the concrete.
Concrete shall be carried out continuously until completion of the part of the
work between construction and other joints of a part of approved extent. If a
temporary cessation of concreting is unavoidable, a construction joint shall be
made.
7.7.4.6 Concrete Curing

All concrete shall be thoroughly cured by having its exposed surfaces sealed by
approved membranes or by being kept moist by approved means for at least 7
days after placing. This shall apply to all surfaces, horizontal, slopping and
vertical, and the curing procedure shall be commenced as soon as is practicable
after the initial set or, where applicable, after the removal of shuttering.
Prior to the initial set, the exposed surfaces of completed works shall be
protected from sun, wind, rain or mechanical force in such a manner as will
avoid damaging the finishing surfaces but will prevent drying out of the concrete.
In exceptional weather or other conditions, the curing period may be varied by

the Engineer's representative without additional payment to the Contractor.
7.7.4.7 Concrete Finishes

All finished concrete surfaces shall be true to the required profiles, dense,
smooth and free from air holes and other blemishes.
After the removal of the shuttering, the work shall be inspected by the Engineer's
representative before any touching up is done. Minor blemishes such as small
air holes stopped with mortar, all as ordered by the Engineer's representative.
Any works out of true or with honeycombing or other faults shall be cut back to
the extent ordered by the Engineer's representative and made good with the
appropriate class of concrete where large amounts are involved or with fine
concrete; otherwise mortar, rendering, etc. will not be permitted.
212
Where so described on the drawings or in the bill of quantities, special surface
finishes shall be produced using appropriate shutter linings or other approved
means.
7.7.4.8 Concrete Joints

The locations and details of expansion, articulation and important construction
joints generally have to be shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall submit details of the type and location of any other joints he
wishes to make to the Engineer's representatives for the latter's approval. In the
case of the principal items of concrete work, these proposals will be regarded as
major temporary works and sufficient drawings, etc. covering the whole structure
must be submitted in advance of the start of the work to enable the complete
concreting plan to be agreed upon. In addition to the foregoing, the Engineer's
representative shall be empowered to require the inclusion of construction joints
not previously intended by the Contractor. Such instructions will be issued in
time for inclusion with the associated shuttering.
All construction joints will normally be required to be keyed or toothed and

four clear days allowed between adjacent pours, except where special
contraction gaps are required. The contraction gaps shall normally be left
open for at least 14 days after concreting the last bay adjacent thereto.
7.7.4.9 Concrete Mix Proportion

The detailed proportions of fine and coarse aggregates, cement and water for
each class of concrete to be used shall be determined on site by preliminary
tests and trial mixes, but must be in accordance with the German DIN Standard
1045 or equivalent international standard.
As soon as is practicable after commencement of the contract, at least 3 months

before start of concrete works, the Contractor, in conjunction with and as
required by the Engineer's representative, shall make preliminary tests from
samples of the materials proposed to be used for the works.
These tests shall be used to determine the required mix proportions necessary
to produce the work strengths together with suitable work abilities; tests shall be
213
carried out in accordance with the relevant DIN Standards. Tests shall be
continued using materials from other sources if necessary until satisfactory
mixes have been achieved.
Details of the trial mixes shall be submitted to the Engineer together with the
mixes proposed for the works. Once approved by the Engineer, mix proportions
shall not be significantly changed without his consent. In all mix designs and
tests, proper account must be taken of the moisture content of the aggregates
and mix details submitted must include the total water contents. Water/cement
ratios shall at all times be the minimum compatible with the required workability.
The Contractor will be deemed to have satisfied himself during the Bid period
that his proposed supplies of raw materials for concrete are adequate and of the
standard necessary to produce workable concrete of the specified strengths. If
the preliminary tests show that other sources of supply must be used, no
additional payment will be made on this account.
7.7.4.10 Concrete Formwork

All formwork shall be of approved design, rigidly constructed of approved
materials, adapted in all respects to the several structures and to the required
finishes thereof, and shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the pressure of
the wet concrete without distortion.
The formwork (roof, beams, etc) shall be constructed with cambers, as is

necessary to produce the finished structures to the correct levels and profiles.
Surfaces of the formwork to surfaces of concrete which will be exposed to view

in the finished work shall be made of sound, well-seasoned ply-wood or
timber as shall be approved by the Engineer. The thickness shall be such
that it can withstand the pressure from the concrete and ensure that the
concrete surfaces are smooth, true and free from blemishes.
Bolts or other internal spacers intended to be recovered shall be fixed so that

they can be easily removed when the formwork is stripped and the holes
remaining after concreting shall be made good with fine concrete or plastic
stubs. No part of any metal tie or spacer remaining permanently embedded in
the concrete shall be closer than 2 cm to the finished surface of the concrete.
214
All pipes, bolts, steelwork and other fixings that are required to be built in or
through the concrete shall be firmly fixed in the formwork, which shall be neatly
cut and fitted to suit joints being caulked where necessary to prevent the escape
of grout. Likewise, cores and other devices used for forming openings, holes,
pockets, chases, etc. shall be fixed to the formwork prior to the wet concrete
reaching their level.
The inner surfaces of the formwork shall be cleaned to remove dirt, shavings,
sawdust and other refuse, and all formwork must be inspected and approved by
the Engineer's representative before any concrete is placed.
No formwork shall be removed without the approval of the Engineer's

representative, but such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of
his contractual responsibilities.
The removal of the formwork shall be carried out carefully so as to avoid

damaging the concrete.
No superloading or any earth, water or other weight or pressure shall be

supplied to any part of a structure until permission is given by the Engineer.
Stripping times for all formwork shall be agreed upon with the Engineer's
representative from time to time and shall take into consideration the nature of
the work and the current climatic conditions.
7.7.4.11 General Stripping Times of Formwork

Foundations: 1 day
Columns: 7 days
Beams: 7 days (side 3 days)
Slabs: (Suspended) 7 days
7.7.4.12 Concrete Water
215
All water for concrete, grout, mortar and the like shall be from approved sources
and free from all matter liable to reduce the strength of the concrete, grout, etc.,
or to produce discoloration or efflorescence.
7.7.4.13 Concrete Testing

Twenty (20) cm test cubes shall be prepared by the Contractor for the purpose
of determining the compressive strength of the concrete at such times as the
Engineer's representative may direct. The preparation and subsequent curing of
cubes shall be according to the requirements of DIN 1048 or equivalent
international standard using metal moulds.
For ordinary Portland cement concrete, three cubes shall be tested at 7 days
and three cubes at 28 days. For rapid hardening Portland cement, two cubes
shall be tested at 3, 7 and 28 days. In both cases, additional groups, each of six
cubes, shall be stored for later testing. Groups of cubes shall be made
whenever ordered by the Engineer's representative.
Where members or structures are not accepted after proof-testing, the

Contractor shall either carry out such strengthening or cut out and replace the
defective material as instructed by the Engineer. Such work shall not be
measured for payment.
For the purpose of testing concrete materials, mixes, etc., the Contractor shall
have the necessary equipment available on site from the start of the contract.
Duplicate copies of all test results, analyses and the like shall be supplied to the
Engineer's representative on pro-formas approved by him.
Comprehensive strength of lean concrete must exceed 35 - 80 kg/cm2. The
cube compressive strength of reinforced concrete must exceed in any case B25
= 250kg/cm2.
The maximum cement content shall be:

340 kg/m3 for cement Z 35 for top size of the aggregate 32 mm10% add. charge
for top size of the aggregate16mm 15% add. charge for cement Z 25
Concrete consistency K2 is required. The site shall be equipped with a flow
216
table with cone for checking the slump according to DIN 1043 or equivalent
international standard.
7.7.5 REINFORCEMENT
7.7.5.1 Reinforcement Materials
Mild steel bars shall be plain, hot-rolled, round steel bays complying with DIN
486 or equivalent international standard.
Fabric reinforcement shall consist of high tensile steel mesh of an approved type
and shall comply with DIN 488.
Test certificates covering each consignment of reinforcing steel shall be supplied

by the Contractor to the Engineer.
Reinforcement shall be stored clear of the ground and with sufficient support to
prevent distortion of long bars.
At the time of concreting, reinforcement shall be free from paint, grease, oil, mill
scale, loose rust and dirt.
To allow for possible delays in shipments or emergency variations in the works,

the Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, build up a reserve of reinforcement
in stock lengths.
Welding of reinforcement shall be carried out only where and how expressly
permitted by the Engineer.
7.7.5.2 Reinforcement Bending

Reinforcing bars shall be accurately bent to the shapes and dimensions
described on the drawings or in the bending schedules. Unless otherwise
described, bending dimensions shall conform to DIN 1045 or any equivalent
international standard.
217
No reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the works, whether or not it is
partially embedded in hardened concrete, unless specially authorised by the
Engineer's representative. All mild steel bars have to be furnished with hooks at
each end.
7.7.5.3 Reinforcement Fixing

Reinforcement bars shall be accurately fixed in position in accordance with the
arrangement shown on the drawings, being securely wired together with soft-
iron binding wire sufficient to prevent displacement during concreting and to
ensure the required cover to bars. Binders and stirrups shall fit tightly to the bars
with which they are intended to be in contact and shall be securely wired thereto.
The cover of concrete to the reinforcement shall be as described on the

drawings and shall be provided and maintained within a tolerance of 3 mm
under the cover, except where specified as a minimum when only the plus
tolerance will be accepted.
Rings or blocks of precast concrete or other approved distance pieces shall be

employed. No wire ties shall project through the finally exposed surfaces of the
concrete.
Reinforcing bars shall be lapped or spliced only at the positions described or

approved.
In adjoining sheets of fabric reinforcement, the end over-lap shall be 30 cm or

one complete mesh in the case of square mesh fabric, while on the side joints
the outer rods shall coincide. The laps shall be securely tied with binding wire of
the type specified herein.
Immediately before concreting, reinforcement shall be checked for position,

cleanliness and cover. Measures shall be taken to ensure that reinforcement
remains in the correct position during placement and compaction of the
concrete.
No concreting shall take place until the Engineer's representative has inspected
and approved the reinforcement.
218
7.7.6 MASONRY WORKS
7.7.6.1 Pre-cast and Solid Blocks
Pre-cast concrete blocks shall be hollow blocks, except where otherwise
specified, complying with DIN 18153. Where described or otherwise ordered,
solid blocks shall be used. All blocks must have a compressive strength not less
than 5 N/mm2. The average of 3 tests shall exceed 6 N/mm2 (referred to
product of total length and width).
Surface of blocks which are not to be rendered or plastered shall be smooth,

otherwise, surfaces shall be much as to provide a good base for the application
of the finish specified.
After casting, blocks shall be cured in an approved manner. The blocks, being
thoroughly dry, shall be laid in true and regular courses to a fair finished surface
on a full bed of 1:3 cement-line mortar of 1 cm average thickness.
Standard sized blocks shall be used whenever possible, and every care shall
be taken to ensure that the perpendiculars are truly plumb and in vertical
alignment in alternate courses. Walls and partitions of the same thickness shall
be bonded to one another (angles and junctions).
Partitions at junctions with walls of greater thickness or concrete columns shall

be
tied to those walls at every course with mild steel bars of the sizes and shapes
described.
Jointing of concrete block walls shall be carried out as the work proceeds and
fair surfaced work shall be flush pointed with mortar of the consistency herein
specified. Joints on surfaces of block walls which are to be rendered, plastered
or tiled shall be raked out at a depth of 0.5 cm. For preliminary on normal test
procedure and test equipment see item: concrete and reinforced concrete
works.
The masonry works shall not start without the Engineer's written approval.
7.7.7 PLASTERING
219
7.7.7.1 Standards and Test
Surfaces that are to be rendered shall be brushed down to remove any loose
material and dust, and joints of block work shall be raked out to a depth of 0.5
cm.
A spatter-dash coat 1:3 cement mortar, mixed with sufficient water to give the
consistency of a thick slurry, shall then be dashed on to the previously damped
surface (inside and outside) to provide a thin rough coating, which shall be
allowed to harden before the rendering is applied.
External plastering shall be supplied in two coats. The first or straightening coat
of 1:3 cement mortar shall be applied to a thickness of 1.5 cm, and when it has
commenced to dry and harden, it shall be combed to provide a key.
The final coat shall be 8 mm thick and shall be rubbed down to a smooth
surface. The complete thickness of the external plaster shall be not less than 2.3
cm.
Internal plastering shall also be supplied in two coats. The first or straightening
coat of 1:3 out of lime plaster with 15% cement content shall be applied to a
thickness of 1.2 cm. The final coat out of pure lime plaster shall be 3 mm thick
and shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface. The complete thickness of the
plaster shall not be less than 1.5 cm.
All plaster edges of doors shall be protected by arris cover angles.
7.7.8 ROOFING WORKS

7.7.8.1 General
Materials and structure parts which must be supplied and built in by the
Contractor shall not have been used before and must be of good quality. Before
starting works, the Contractor must take exact measurement of the structures.
Parts made of different metals shall not be in contact with each other if this may
lead to corrosion of any other unfavourable condition.
Should no other protection measures be applicable, fixing parts must be

galvanised.
220
The connections and fixings must be executed so as to allow, under thermal
changes, the expansion, contraction and displacement of parts of the structure
without causing leakages. Appropriate measures must be taken against lifting
and damage caused by wind gusts.
In case of rainfall, all roofing works may only continue after complete drying of all
layers concerned.
The roofing felt layers are jointed by bituminous bonding compound so that no
cavities shall remain between the individual layers. All roofing felt layers must
be executed with overlap seams of at least 10 cm.
Insulation of roof materials that may be used for the execution of the roofing
have to be submitted to the Engineer with the indication of their designation and
their manufacturer. The bid price includes operation platforms and scaffolding.
7.7.8.2 Roof Construction

Roofs shall be constructed as follows:
(a) The roof slab shall be of watertight concrete effectuated by a suitable

grain size distribution curve, and adequate water-cement ratio and
concrete additives.
(b) If necessary, the slab shall be covered by a screed of 1.5 slope to all
rainwater inlets and fall pipes. No pan formation of surface will be
accepted.
(c) The screed shall be tested by prime coating bonding adhesive.
(d) Bituminous roofing felt adhesive.
(e) Vapour seal (asphalt roofing felt) vented.
(f) Bituminous roofing felt adhesive.
(g) Heat insulation, 6 cm felt covered urethan foam panels, specific weight
at least 30 kg/m3. The heat insulating property must exceed 1.0 m2 ho
C/Kcal.
(h) Bituminous bonding compound B 85/25, 2 Kgf/m2, hot mix.
(i) Asphalt roofing felt.
221
(j) Preference will be given to prefabricated composite material for the
layers (g) to (i).
(k) Bituminous bonding compound B 85/25, 2 Kgf/m2, hot mix or placed by
surface heating of the lower prefabricated composite felt. Classified
2
asphalt roofing felt 200 gr/m . The complete roof insulating shall be
covered with gravel 1/4 - 1/2 inch, 4 cm thick. The flat roof gullies with
sieves shall be duly sealed with the roofing felt layers.
7.7.8.3 Roof rehabilitation

The bidder shall rehabilitate the existing roof of the control buildings for existing
substations using the best engineering practice. Repair works shall be carried
out on the following components where necessary:
- steel girders
- steel purling
- steel sheets; zinc/aluminium coated
- heat insulation
ceiling board, non combustible, no asbestos
The offered design shall be absolutely waterproof under all weather conditions.
The Contractor shall remain responsible for all consequent damages caused by
failing this requirement.
7.7.9 MECHANIC, JOINER AND LOCKSMITH WORKS

7.7.9.1 Doors
All doors shall be rehabilitated where necessary using the best engineering
practice. This shall include repainting and making the door look new. Where
necessary the door shall be replaced with a new one as per the Engineer’s
approval. All doors shall be fully equipped with:
(a) Universal locks: heavy mortice lock, double throw locking action with 8
mm followers; brass latch bolt; 10 mm thick security deed bolt;
completely enclosed case; to suit a profile cylinder with transmission bar.
(b) Master key system for the entire Substation on the basis of profile
cylinders with two complete sets of keys.
222
(c) Latches, long aluminium plates, pin hinges 160mm, fixing bolts, door
stoppers, etc.
The door of the battery room shall be equipped with a splash water-proof louvre
grid on the lower part of the door
7.7.9.2 Windows
Window frames shall be preferably of standard aluminium profile or mild steel
(ST 37) according to German DIN standards or equivalent international
standards.
All frames made of steel shall be made rustproof by hot-dip galvanizing followed
by the application of one coat of calcium plumate primer. Site painting of frames
shall be as specified under "Painting".
Sliding Window made of aluminum profile shall be preferred. The Contractor

shall
submit for approval to the Engineer details and sketches of his proposals for
windows, sunblades, gearing and fixing before placing any orders.-
7.7.9.3 Galvanizing
All visible structural parts and fixing materials made of steel shall be hot-dip
galvanized as specified under item "Steel Structure".
7.7.10 PAINTS AND PAINTINGS

All paints shall be of approved makes and colours and suitable for the prevailing
climate at the site. Special purpose paint shall be of a make with a proven
record of resistance to be particular conditions necessitating its use.
All paints shall be applied to dry surfaces, to metal and timber surfaces, it shall
be applied by brush and well worked into the material. Other methods of
application will be considered for painting plastered or concrete surfaces and the
like. Such methods shall be approved by the Engineer.
7.7.10.1 Painting Steelwork (ungalvanized) on Site

Structural steelwork shall, before delivery and erection, have been treated as
223
specified in the drawings. After erection, at a time to be agreed upon with the
Engineer's representative, steelwork not to be encased in concrete shall be
cleared, including the complete removal of any rusting which may have
developed, the shop coat of red lead made good, and the steelwork immediately
given a second coat of red lead paint. Final painting shall consist of two under c
oats and one finishing gloss coat, all of oil based paints of approved
colours. Steel work surfaces to be encased or covered with concrete shall be
free from all loose rust and reasonably clean when the concrete is placed.
During site erection of steelwork, surfaces to be in permanent contact shall
receive their second coat of red lead paint immediately before erection so that
the surfaces are brought together wet. All surfaces of steelwork which will be
finally inaccessible to painting (e.g. stanchion surfaces adjacent to walls) shall
be given two coats of approved bituminous paint in lieu of the treatment
specified above.
7.7.10.2 Painting, Rainwater, Pipes

These shall be delivered coated internally and externally as specified.
Thereafter
they shall be given externally two undercoats and one gloss finishing coat, all
of
oil based paints.
7.7.10.3 Painting Timber

Generally only softwood will require painting. After all specified treatment,
joinery and finished wood-work shall be knotted, stopped and primed and then
given two undercoats and one gloss finishing coat, all of oil based paints.
Surfaces shall be
rubbed down as necessary between coats.
7.7.10.4 Painting Concrete

Where required to be painted, concrete surfaces shall be cleaned down, prime –
one coat, then given one undercoat and one finishing coat of plastic paint.
7.7.10.5 Painting Plastered Surfaces

These shall be cleaned down, sized or sealed and then primed and given two
coats
of washable oil or emulsion paint.
224
7.7.10.6 Painting Plaster-board and Ceiling boards
These shall be cleaned down, sealed and painted in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
7.7.10.7 Painting Battery Room

All painting works inside the battery room (including door and windows) shall
be executed with acid resisting paint.
7.7.11 GLAZING FORMS

Glass shall comply with DIN 1249 or equivalent international standard and shall
be of the type, quality and substances specified hereinafter.
Glazing to external window frames shall be in ordinary quality sheet glass of the
sizes shown on the drawings. The glass shall be secured in accordance with
the window frame manufacturer's recommendations relative to the local climatic
conditions.
Polished wired glass 6 mm thick shall be used for louvre blades, except for
those in the offices, where 6 mm translucent sheet glass shall be provided.
Glazing to internal window frames and partitions shall be in ordinary quality

sheet glass of the sizes shown on the drawings, 6 mm thick. Ordinary quality
translucent sheet glass shall be used for glazed panels in internal timber doors
other than those for doors leading to toilets, in which 6 mm translucent glass of
approved pattern shall be fixed.
Glazing to metal frames shall be carried out with metallic putty and fixed with
spring slips, for glazing to timber frames, the best linseed oil putty shall be used.
In all cases, the glass shall be well bedded on strips of wash-leather and back
puttied. All surplus putty or mastic shall be cleaned off on completion of glazing.
7.7.12 WATER AND SEWAGE INSTALLATION WORKS

The water system within the substation premises shall be made fully functional
where necessary. All leakages shall be stopped in existing control buildings..
225
The water system shall be connected to the public water system. In the event
that public water system is not available within the vicinity of the substation, a
potable water bore hole shall be sunk within the substation premises. A 10,000
litre reinforced plastic water tank shall be installed on a concrete floor close to
the bore hole site. The tank shall serve as a reservoir and shall receive water
supply through a submersible pump of appropriate rating. A 5,000 litre
reinforced plastic water tank shall be installed overhead on steel platform not
less than 5 metres high and this tank shall be supplied water through an electric
pump installed adjacent to the ground water tank with all automatic accessories
and fittings. The water system wthin the control building shall be supplied
through the overhead tank.
7.7.13 FLOOR FINISH AND FLOOR COVERING WORKS

Grating shall be of the type described, of a thickness according to statical
requirements and shall be galvanized.
Checkered plates covering cable trenches shall be of the thickness and

sections described, shall comply with statical requirements, and shall be
galvanized. Each panel shall be complete with lifting holes, and holding down
screws shall be provided where required. Two sets of lifting key shall also be
provided and these shall be handed over to the Employer when an appropriate
Certificate of Completion is issued.
The floors shall be properly finished with ceramic tiles as shall be approved by
the Engineer in all rooms. The floors and walls of the toilet and battery room
shall be tiled as specified below.
Tiling for the battery room shall be carried out with acid resistant tiles according
to DIN 13352 or equivalent international standard. The surface to receive tiles
shall be free of dust, dirt, oil, grease and other deleterious substances. Walls in
the battery room shall be tiled up to 1.50 m above floor level. All sanitary rooms
shall be tiled according to the drawings and as described in the bill of quantity.
This points shall be filled with white cement or with other colours as requested
by the Engineer.
226
7.7.14 CABLE TRENCHES
7.7.14.1 Indoor Cable Trenches
The indoor cable trench shall be fully rehabilitated Cable trenches shall have
coverage by means of slabs, gratings or checkered plates as requested by the
Engineer.
All cable entries to the Substation building are to be waterproof. Cable entry
sealing works shall be executed with light-weight concrete (specified weight
approx. 250 kg/m3) and/or non-combustible sealing foam. This detail and the
choice of sealing materials will, in any case, be subject to approval. For future
extensions, the building shall be equipped with empty entries closed by water-
proof locking.
Cables of different voltage levels shall be installed on separate cable trays.
All cables traces for control cables which are placed inside HV cable trenches
shall be executed in fire-protected way by use of mineral fibre armoured panels
of non-organic matter. The use of asbestos materials will not be accepted. The
panels shall have a thickness of 20 mm and they shall be resistant against
humidity, water and rotting.
7.7.14.2 Outdoor Cable Trenches

The cable trenches inside the Substation yard are made of reinforced concrete.
Prefabricated trenches are accepted. They are covered with concrete slabs of
suitable size and weight, for easy lifting, they over-lap the trenches.
The trenches shall have the level of the gravel surface. Only the covers shall
exceed level of the gravel. The trenches are to be sloped in the direction of a
cable trench drainage pit. The pit shall have a depth of at least two meters; it is
to be filled with gravel.
The bottom of all ducts shall be concreted true to the required gradient. Should
corrections of the gradient become necessary later on, a cement coating (the
mixture ratio being 1:3) has to be applied.
227
Cables of different voltage levels shall be laid in separate trenches respectively,
shall be installed on separate cable trays.
Cable laying in all outside trenches shall not start without written notice to the
Engineer after having checked gradients and the satisfactory workmanship.
Trench covers shall be made of reinforced concrete B 30. The shuttering shall
be smooth and clean, preference shall be given to steel shuttering. Covers with
broken edges and corners shall be rejected by the Engineer. Lifting loops of
covers, if inserted, shall be of the galvanized type only.
7.7.15 RAIN OF GROUND AND SEWAGE DISPOSAL

The entire Substation area shall be drained by systems of underground drainage
pipes where necessary..
The design of the drainage system(s) as well as the main materials are subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
7.7.15.1 Manholes
Manholes and inspection chambers shall be cleared of any obstructions.
Manhole covers and frames shall be provided where they have been damaged.
All covers shall be greased before being finally placed in the frames.
Two sets of lifting keys shall be provided, and these shall be handed over to the
Employer when an appropriate "Certificate of Completion" is issued.
7.7.15.2 Septic Tank and Soakage Pit System

The sewage treatment of the Substation shall be made fully functional where
necessary.
7.7.15.3 Toilet wares and accessories

All toilet wares such as WC, wash hand basin, taps, showers etc. shall be
replaced with new ones. The samples shall be approved by the Engineer.
228
7.7.16 ROAD WORKS
(i) Roads, Verges and Hardstandings

Roads, verges and hardstandings includes the design, excavation for,
preparation of formation and construction of the roads, verges and
hardstandings together with any reinstatement of roads, constructed by
other Contractors necessitated by the performance of the works covered
by this contract.
(ii) Drains and Pipes Crossing

Before construction of the roads, verges and hardstandings, all drains
and pipes for sewage, water, electrical cables etc., shall be completely
installed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(iii) Road Works

All works inside the Substation and the necessary access roads shall be
made out of reinforced concrete B 25 according to BS CP 114 or
equivalent international standards. The pavement thickness shall be
determined by site conditions after soil investigation, the design being
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(iv) Preparation of formation

The formation shall be excavated, cleared, freed from mud and shirry
and properly shaped and compacted by rolling to an even and uniform
surface to the levels shown on the drawings. The compaction shall be to
at least 98% of the proctor dry density.
(v) Sub Base

The sub-base shall be constructed of approved naturally occurring
material or crushed rock compacted 100% of the Proctor dry density and
achieving a CBR value of not less than 30%.
(vi) Finishing
The surface of the concrete shall have a broom finishing. Every 5m
transverse to the road, there shall be a construction joint 5cm x 2cm.
229
The width of the access road and the main road inside the Substation
shall be 5m. Second class roads shall be 3.5m or 2.5m as requested in
the drawings or by the Engineer. The outside of the roads shall be
limited by precast stones (12 - 18 cm) long. The use of kerbstones can
be eliminated in case of suitable position of ground drainage pipes.
(vii) Base Course for Bituminous Pavements

Material for these course for flexible pavement should be mechanically
stable material or crushed gravel or crushed rock with a maximum
aggregate size of 37.5mm and with a proportion of between 20 and 50%
passing through the 0.425mm sieve.
The material passing through the 4.25mm sieve must achieve a liquid
limit not greater than 25% and a plasticity index not greater than 6%.
The base course material should be compacted to a field density of
100% of the Proctor dry density. Sun-base and base course materials
must be compacted with a smooth steel wheeled rolled in layers each of
compacted thickness not greater than 150mm.
viii) Surface Dressing

Surface dressing for footpaths shall consist of chippings of maximum
size 20mm (spread at a rate of 18 kg/m2) and minimum size 6 mm
(spread at a rate of 7 kg/m2), rolled gently with a smooth prematic roller
onto medium curing cut back bitumen spread at a rate of between 0.9 to
1.5 litres/m2. The prima coat shall be medium curing cut back bitumen
spread at a rate of between 0.5 - 1.0 litres/m2.
7.7.16.1 Kerbs
Precast concrete kerbs, channels and quadrants shall be manufactured
from B 25 concrete and shall be to the sizes and shapes as shown on
the drawings.
Specially cast radius kerbs shall be used on curves where the radius is
12 m or less.
230
All kerbs, channels and quadrants shall be bedded on a minimum of 20
mm layer of 1:3 cement mortar on previously constructed foundations
and laid true to line and level. Joints shall be filled and neatly pointed
with 1:3 cement mortar.
7.7.16.2 Substation open space

The outdoor space in the substation excluding the 33kV switchyard shall
be constructed using interlocking stones.
7.7.17 FENCES, GATES AND GATE-HOUSE

The substation perimeter fencing shall be made of 9” blocks with
reinforced concrete columns placed at not more than 3m spacing. Iron
gate shall be an integral part of the fence. The design shall be approved
by the Engineer.
The existing gates where applicable shall be rehabilitated including

repainting as shall be approved by the Engineer.
The existing gate houses shall be fully rehabilitated including

replacement of toilet wares etc. New gate house shall be constructed in
substations where they are presently not available. The design shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
231
SECTION VIII BID SUBMITTALS
BID FORM
Bid Letter
NAME OF CONTRACT:
TO:
We have examined the Conditions of Contract, Employer’s Requirements,

Schedules, the attached Appendix and Addenda Nos…………………….of the
above-named Works. We have examined, understood and checked these
documents and have ascertained that they contain no error or other defects.
We accordingly offer to design, execute and complete the Works and remedy
any defects therein, in conformity with this bid which includes all these
documents and the enclosed Proposal for the sum of
(in currencies of
payment)………………………………………………………………...
We agree to abide by this bid until……………..and it shall remain binding upon

us and may be accepted at any time before that date. We acknowledge that the
Appendix forms part of this Bid Letter.
232
If this offer is accepted, we will provide the specified Performance Security,
commence the Works as soon as is reasonably practicable after the
Commencement Date, and complete the Works in accordance with the above-
named documents within the Time for Completion. We guarantee that the
Works will then conform with the Schedule of Guarantees.
Unless and until a formal Agreement is prepared and executed this bid letter,
together with your written acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding contract
between us.
We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any bid you may
receive.
Signature…………………………..in the capacity

of……………………………………
Duly authorised to sign bid for and on behalf of
______
Address:
Date: __________
233
BID SECURITY FORM
Example form of Bid Security
Brief description of Contract:
Name and address of Beneficiary

(whom the tender documents
define as the Employer).
We have been informed that (hereinafter called the “Principal”) is

submitting an offer for such Contract in response to your invitation, and that the
conditions of your invitation (the “conditions of invitation”, which are set out in a
document entitled instructions to bidders) require his offer to be supported by a
bid security.
At the request of the Principal, we (name of bank)

hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you, the Beneficiary/Employer, any
sum or sums not exceeding in total the amount of (say:
) upon receipt by us of your demand
in writing and your written statement (in the demand) stating that:
a) the Principal has, without your agreement, withdrawn his offer after the
latest time specified for its submission and before the expiry of its period
of validity, or
b) the Principal has refused to accept the correction of error in his offer in
accordance with such conditions of invitation, or
c) you awarded the Contract to the Principal and he has failed to comply
with sub-clause 1.6 of the conditions of the Contract, or
d) you awarded the Contract to the Principal and he has failed to comply
with sub-clause 4.2 of the conditions of the Contract.
Any demand for payment must contain your signature(s) which must be
authenticated by your bankers or by a notary public. The authenticated demand
and statement must be received by us at this office on or before (the date 35
days after the expiry of the validity of the Bid Letter) , when this guarantee
shall expire and shall be returned to us.
234
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees,
published as number 458 by the International Chamber of Commerce, except
as stated above.
Date Signature (s)
235
PERFORMANCE SECURITY FORM
Sample form of performance security demand guarantee
Brief description of Contract:
Named and address of Beneficiary

(whom the Contract
defines as the Employer).

your manufacturer under such Contract, which requires him to obtain a
performance security.
At the request of the Principal, we (name of bank) hereby

irrevocably undertake to pay you, the Beneficiary/Employer, any sum or sums
not exceeding in total the amount of (the “guaranteed amount”, say:
) upon receipt by us of your demand in writing
and your written statement stating:
a) that the Principal is in breach of his obligation(s) under the Contract, and
b) the respect in which the Principal is in breach.
Following the receipt by us of an authenticated copy of the taking-over

certificate for the whole of the works under clause 10 of the conditions of the
Contract, such guaranteed amount shall be reduced by % and we shall
promptly notify you that we have received such certificate and have reduced the
guarantee amount accordingly.
Any demand for payment must contain your [minister’s/directors’] signature(s)

which must be authenticated by your bankers or by a notary public. The
authenticated demand and statement must be received by us at this office on or
before (the date 70 days after the expected expiry of the Defects Notification
Period for the Works) (the “expiry date”),
when this guarantee shall expire and shall be returned to us.
We have been informed that the Beneficiary may require the Principal to extend
this guarantee if the performance certificate under the Contract has not been
236
issued by the date 28 days prior to such expiry date. We undertake to pay you
such guaranteed
amount upon receipt by us, within such period of 28 days, of your demand win
writing and your written statement that the performance certificate has not been
issued, for reason attributable to the Principal, and that this guarantee has not
been extended.
This guarantee shall be governed by the laws of and

shall be subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, published ad
number 458 by the International Chamber of Commerce, except as stated
above.
Date Signature(s)
237
ADVANCE PAYMENT GUARANTEE FORM
Sample form of advance payment guarantee
Brief description of Contract
Name and address of Beneficiary

(whom the Contract defines as
the Employer).

your manufacturer under such Contract and wished to receive and advance
payment, for which the Contract requires him to obtain a guarantee.
At the request of the Principal, we (name of bank) hereby

irrevocably undertake to pay you, the Beneficiary/Employer, any sum or sums
not exceeding in total the amount of (the “guaranteed amount”, say:
) upon receipt by us of your demand in writing
and your written statement stating:
a) that the Principal has failed to repay the advance payment in

accordance with the conditions of the Contract, and
b) the amount which the Principal has failed to repay.
The guarantee shall become effective upon receipt [of the first instalment] of
the advance payment by the Principal. Such guaranteed amount shall be
reduced by the amounts of the advance payment repaid to you, as evidenced
by your notices issued under sub-clause 14.6 of the conditions of the contract.
Following receipt (from the Principal) of a copy of each purported notice, we
shall promptly notify you of the revised guaranteed amount accordingly.
Any demand for payment must contain your signature(s) which must be
authenticated by your bankers or by a notary public. The authenticated
demand and statement must be received by us at this office on or before (the
date 70 days after the expected expiry of the Time for Completion) (the “expiry
date”), when this guarantee shall be returned to us.
We have been informed that the Beneficiary may require the Principal to extend
this guarantee if the advance payment has not been repaid by the date 28 days
prior to such expiry date. We undertake to pay you such guaranteed amount
upon receipt by us, within such period of 28 days, of your demand in writing and
your written statement that the advance payment has not been repaid and that
this guarantee has not been extended.
This guarantee shall be governed by the laws of and shall

be subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, published as number
458 by the International Chamber of Commerce, except as stated above.
Date Signature(s)
238
SECTION IX
TECHNICAL PROPOSAL
(SCHEDULES)
239
9.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. All schedules in this Technical Proposal must be completed. Failure to do
so may lead to disqualification.
2. Clear copies of brochures of equipment manufactured by the bidder and

his other manufacturers must be attached in all the four copies of the
proposal.
3. The Financial offer must be submitted in a different envelope and shall

contain the Bid Bond. The letter of bid submission should only indicate
that the Bid Bond is enclosed in the Financial Proposal. On no account
should a photocopy of the Bid Bond be enclosed in the Technical
Proposal as this will expose the value of the financial offer.
4. The EPC Contractor shall be fully responsible for the bid preparation and
submission of all requested information. The Employer shall have the right to
disqualify any submission found to be non-responsive and no inquiries shall
be entertained.
240
9.1 SCHEDULE OF BID INFORMATION
Bidders are required to submit the following information and documents. All
documents submitted shall be stamped and signed by the accredited representative
of the Bidder. The Employer may request to sight the originals of any of the
documents. Failure to submit any of the documents may result in rejection of Bid.
S/N DETAILS OF THE DOCUMENTS/ CERTIFICATE NO./ REMARKS

INFORMATION REFERENCE NO.
1. Certificate of Incorporation in Photocopy to be attached
Nigeria or Overseas including
shareholding
2. Current 3 year Tax Certificate in Photocopy to be attached
case of Nigerian Company
3. Current Certificate of Registration Photocopy to be attached
with PHCN (Category D) or FMP&S
4. Audited Annual Report for the past 3 N/A Photocopy to be attached
years
5. Annual Turnover for past 5 years N/A Photocopy to be attached
6. Company profile including N/A Copy to be attached
organizational structure
7. Evidence of Joint Venture N/A Copy to be attached
Agreement
8. List of Equipment N/A Copy to be attached using
manufacturers/suppliers and given Format
subcontractors
9. N/A Photocopy to be attached
Evidence of payment of the non-
refundable bid fee of N1,000,000.00
for the Lot bidded for
10 Letter of invitation to bid duly signed N/A Photocopy to be attached
by the Chairman, Steering
Committee
11. N/A Original copies of the
Brochures of equipment to be brochures gto be
supplied by the bidder submitted
12. N/A Copy to be attached using
Record of experience on similar job given Format
(project completion certificates/
photographs and list of on-going
jobs)
13. List of key personnel with their CV N/A Copy to be attached using
given Format
14. List of the Equipment owned by the N/A Copy to be attached using
company that will be available for given Format
deployment in the project
15. Works execution programme (in N/A Based on 9 months
form of a Gantt chart) completion period
241
9.2 SCHEDULE ON JOINT VENTURES
9.2.1 Information on Joint Ventures

Full information on Joint Venture for the project must be given. Joint Ventures
must comply with the following requirements
1. A Joint Venture agreement must be submitted along with the tender
and the Employer may request to sight the original.
2. The lead partner shall meet not less 60 percent of all requirements
given in relevant sections
3. The other partners shall meet individually not less than 30 percent of all
requirements
4. The Joint Venture must satisfy collectively all requirements and the
relevant figures for each of the JV partners shall be added together to
arrive at the joint venture’s total capacity.
9.2.2 Joint Venture Summary
Name of Joint Venture:

1 Lead partner
2 Partner
3 Partner
9.2.3 Details of the Joint Venture Partners

All individual firms and each partner of a joint venture bidding for this project
are requested to provide the information in this form.
A. Lead Partner
1 Name of Firm:
2 Head Office Address:
3 Contact Person:
Telephone: Mobile Phone:
Fax: E-Mail:
4. Company’s Web Site:
5 Place of Incorporation/Registration
6 Year of Incorporation/Registration
Nationality of Owners
S/N Name Nationality
1
2
242
3
4
B. Partner
1 Name of Firm:
3 Contact Person:
Fax: E-Mail:
1
2
3
4
C. Partner
1 Name of Firm:
3 Contact Person:
Fax: E-Mail:
1
2
3
4
243
9.3 General Experience
The bidder whether in Joint Venture or not shall meet the following minimum
criteria:
a. average annual turnover as prime contractor over the last five (5) years
of US$ 2.0 million equivalent; and
b. successful experience as prime contractor in the execution of at least

one (1) project of a similar nature and complexity comparable to the
proposed contract within the last five(5) years;.
9.4 Personnel Capabilities

The bidder must have suitably qualified personnel to fill the relevant positions
as detailed below:
Position Experience In similar As Manager of

(Years) Works(Years) similar Works
(Years)
Project Manager 25 10 5
Site Manager (Electrical) 20 10 5
Substation Automation 20 10 5
Engineer(If automation
is included in the Lot)
Civil Engineer 20 10 5
9.5 Personnel Information

For specific positions essential to contract implementation and listed in the
table below, the bidder should provide the names of at least two candidates
qualified to meet the specified requirements stated for each position. The data
on their experience should be supplied in separate sheets using one form of
Candidate Curriculum Vitae for each candidate.
1 Project Manager Name of prime

candidate
Name of alternate
candidate
2 Site Manager Name of prime
(Electrical) candidate
Name of alternate
candidate
3 Substation Name of prime
Automation candidate
Engineer(If Name of alternate
applicable) candidate
4 Civil Engineer Name of prime
candidate
Name of alternate
candidate
244
Candidate Curriculum Vitae
Name of Bidder:
Position: Prime Candidate ………..

Alternate Candidate ………
Name of Candidate
Nationality
Professional
Qualifications
(Indicate the year
obtained)
Name of
Institution(s) where
the qualification was
obtained
Languages spoken a.
(Indicate the b.
proficiency: excellent, c.
good, fair, or poor) d.
Name of Employer
Address of Employer
Present Employment Fax Telephone

Contact Person:
E Mail Address:
Job title of candidate Years with present
employer
Summary of Professional Experience over the last 20 years (25 years for
Project Manager)
From To Relevant Technical and Management experience
Certification:
I, the undersigned, certify that to the best of my knowledge and belief, these biodata
correctly describe myself, my qualifications and my experience.
245
. Date: .
Signature of Staff Member or authorized official from the firm Day/Month/Year
9.6 Equipment Capabilities

The firm shall own, or have assured access (through hire, lease, purchase
agreement, or other means) to the following key items of equipment in full
working order, and must demonstrate that, based on known commitments,
they will be available for use in the proposed contract. Other equipment which
the bidder would deploy for the project shall also be included.
S/N EQUIPMENT/PLANT MINIMUM OWNER OF PLANT

NUMBER
REQUIRED
1. 40 Ton mobile crane 1
2. 20 Ton mobile crane 1
3. High precision earth resistance test set 2
4. Dielectric (Insulation Resistance) test 2
set
5. Primary current injection test set 1
6. Secondary current injection test set 1
7. Transformer oil tester 1
8. Line stringing equipment 2
9.
10.
11.
12.
9.7 Equipment Information

The bidder shall provide adequate information to demonstrate clearly that it
has the capability to meet the requirements for each and all items of
equipment listed in the instructions to the bidders. A separate form shall be
prepared for each item of equipment listed in section 9.6 or for alternative
equipment proposed by the bidder
Name of Bidder
Item of equipment
Equipment Name of manufacturer Model and power rating
Information Capacity Year of manufacture
Current location
Current
Details of current commitments
Status
Indicate source of equipment:
Source Owned ………….. Rented …..……. Leased …………...
Specially Manufactured ……………
Omit the following information for equipment owned by the Bidder or JV

Partner
246
Name of owner
Address of owner
Owner
Telephone Contact Name and title
Fax
Details of rental/lease/manufacture agreements

specific to the project
Agreements
9.8 Financial Capability

The bidder whether in Joint Venture or not shall demonstrate that he has
access to, or has available, liquid assets, lines of credit, and other financial
means sufficient to meet the construction cash flow for a period of three
months estimated at US$2.0 million equivalent, apart from the applicant’s
commitments for other contracts.
Financial Information
Bidders including each partner of a joint venture shall provide financial
information to demonstrate that they meet the requirements stated in the bid
document. Each bidder or partner of a joint venture must complete the form
below.. If necessary, use separate sheets to provide complete banker
information. A copy of the audited balance sheets should be attached.
Name of Bidder or partner of a joint venture
Name of Banker
Address of Banker
Telephone Contact name and title
Fax
A confirmatory letter from a Bank acceptable to the Employer shall be

included.
Specify proposed sources of finance to meet the cash flow demands of the
project.
Source of Financing Amount (US$ equivalent)

1
247
2
3
4
Audited Account:
The audited balance sheets for the last three(3)years shall be submitted and
must demonstrate the soundness of the firm’s financial position, showing
long-term profitability.
Summarize actual assets and liabilities in US Dollar equipment (at the rates of
exchange current at the end of each year) for the previous three years.
Attach audited financial statements for the last three years (for the individual
bidder or each partner of a joint venture
Firm may submit their balance sheets certified by a registered account, and
supported by copies of tax returns, if audits are not required by the laws of
their countries of origin
DETAILS Previous Three Years

1 2 3
Total Assets
Current Assets
Total liabilities
Current liabilities
Profit before tax
Profit after tax
9.9 Turnover Record

Total value of average annual turnover, in US$ equivalent, converted at the
rate of exchange at the end of the period reported
Partner Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Lead
Partner
Partner
Partner
Total
9.10 Project execution Capabilities
Information on projects of similar nature and complexity completed

The bidder shall use a separate sheet for each contract of similar nature
and complexity carried out by each partner of the Joint Venture.
248
1 Name of the Bidder or partner of a Joint Venture:
2 Number of Contract:
3 Name of Contract:
4 Country:
5 Name of Employer:
6 Employer’s Address:
7 Nature of works and special features relevant to this contract that you
are bidding for:
8 Contract Role: (a) Sole Contractor…….. (b) Subcontractor ……..

(c) Partner in Joint Venture ………
9 Value of the total contract/subcontractor/partner share (in specified
currencies at completion, or a date of award for on-going contract
10 Equivalent value US$:
11 Date of award:
12 Date of completion:
13 Completion Certificate issued to be attached
14 Contract/Subcontract duration (years and months)
15 Specified requirements:
Details of current contract commitments/works in progress of similar

nature and complexity:
The bidder and each partner of a Joint Venture shall provide information on
their current commitments on all contracts of similar nature and complexity
that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or acceptance has been
received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which full
completion certificate has not yet been issued.
The bidder shall use a separate sheet for each of the above mentioned
contract.
Name of the Bidder or Partner of a Joint Venture:
249
S/N Name of Contract Cost of the Date Estimated
Contract Commenced Completion
(Current US$ Date
Equivalent)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
9.11 Litigation History

The firm shall provide accurate information on any litigation or arbitration from
contracts completed or under its execution over the last five years.
Bidders, including each of the partners of a joint venture, should provide

information on any history of litigation or arbitration resulting from contracts
executed in the last five years or currently under execution. A separate sheet
should be used for each partner.
Year Award for or against Name of client, Disputed amount

Bidder cause of litigation, (current value in
and matter in US$ equivalent)
dispute
9.12 Schedule of Equipment manufacturer and subcontractor

The bidder shall provide adequate information on the particulars of the
manufacturers of the equipment they intend to install under this project. A
confirmatory letter from the manufacturer (including Quality Assurance
Certification –ISO 9001) of asterisked equipment shall be submitted. For the
concrete poles, FMP&S Certification for the Pole Factory shall be submitted.
Failure to submit the above documents may lead to disqualification of bid.
250
DETAILS EQUIPMENT AND WORK PROPOSED COUNTRY OF
MANUFACTURER OR ORIGIN
SUBCONTRACTOR
1.* Completely Self Protected Distribution
transformer
2.* Concrete poles
3.* Aluminum conductor
4.* Substation automation (if applicable to
the substation)
5* Ring Master SF6 11kV breaker

6.* Surge Arresters
7. Line fittings
8. Disc and pot insulators
9. Galvanised angle and channel iron
10. Control cables
11. Power cables
12.* DC battery bank & charger
13. All Civil Works including substation
building
9.13 Substation Automation

The bidder shall indicate in the table below the particulars of the substation
automation system they intend to supply if it is applicable to the injection
substation.
S/N DETAILS OFFERED

1. Type of software
2. Architecture
3. Protocol
4. Other details
9.14 Works Programme

The bidder shall submit along with bid the proposed works programme (Gantt
Chart) based on a completion period of nine (9) months.
9.15 Minimum Delivery Capacity

The bidder shall indicate the manufacturer’s delivery capacity of the
equipment/materials he intends to supply for the project within six months
from the date of commencement of the contract as detailed below:
251
DETAILS EQUIPMENT AND WORK PROPOSED DELIVERY
MANUFACTURER CAPACITY WITHIN
OR SIX MONTHS
SUBCONTRACTOR
UNIT QUANTITY
1. Completely Self Protected Distribution
transformer:
i. 25kVA 11/0.415kV transformer No.
ii. 50kVA 11/0.415kV transformer No.
2. Concrete poles No.
3. 150mm2 AAC Aluminum conductor km
4. 100mm2 AAC Aluminum conductor km
5. LT Aerial Bunched Cable km

6. Ring Master SF6 11kV breaker No.
7. 33kV Surge Arrester No.
8. 11kV Surge Arrester No.
9. 33kV J&P Fuse complete assembly No.
10. 11kV J&P Fuse complete assembly No.
11. 33kV Isolator No.
12. 11kv Isolator No.
13. 11kV Isolators No.
14. Galvanised angle iron 33kV cross arm No.
15. Galvanised angle iron 11kV cross arm No.
16. Galvanised channel iron (9ft for 33kV) No.
17. Galvanised channel iron (6ft for 11kV) No.
18. Galvanised angle iron Tie-strap No.
19. Disc insulators No.
20. 33kV Pot insulator complete with spindle No.
21. 11kV Pot insulator complete with spindle No.
22. Tension clamp(complete and for 33kV) Set
23. Tension clamp(complete and for 11kV) Set
24. Galvanised angle and channel iron No.
25. 4x4mm2 PVC/SWA/PVC control cable Km
26. 2.5x7mm2 PVC/SWA/PVC control cable Km
29. 33kV 1x240mm2 XLPE cable Km
32. DC battery bank & charger Set
9.16 EVALUATION CRITERIA

Introduction
In order to ensure that bids are evaluated on equal and measurable basis, the
under listed criteria shall be used in the evaluation process. It is envisaged
that the criteria would ensure that the most competitive bidder shall emerge.
252
The Employer shall set an Evaluation Committee made up of specialists in
Electromechanical projects, Procurement and Finance matters. The bid
evaluation scrutiny shall determine the competitiveness of the bidder’s
technical and financial offers. This shall generally include the scrutiny of the
bidder’s managerial, financial capability, confirmation of their previous
experiences in performing similar projects, amongst others.
.
Evaluation Criteria
The bids received shall in the first instance be subjected to a first level
(General Criteria) evaluation using the criteria set below. The short listed bids
shall then be subjected to second level (Specific Criteria) evaluation from
which the best three bidders shall emerge. For this second level evaluation,
the litigation history of a bidder and availability of confirmatory letters from
equipment manufacturers shall be used as part of the evaluation parameters.
The financial proposals of the three shortlisted bidders shall be opened and
evaluated further.
The Employer may during the evaluation process request to sight and
authenticate the originals of any document or certificate submitted by the
bidder. Inability of any bidder to accede to this request may lead to
disqualification.
S/N EVALUATION CRITERIA POINTS REMARKS

(%)
1. Experience on project of similar
nature and complexity 30
2. Key personnel to be deployed for 20
the project and company profile
3. Equipment at the disposal of the 10
bidder for that will be available for
deployment for the project
4. Works programme (Gantt Chart) 10
5. Financial Capability to execute the 15

project
6 Local Content; Man power (5) and 10

Sourcing of Materials (5)
7. Submittal of Certificates 5
TOTAL
100
253
NOTE: * Non submission of Certificate of Incorporation, Tax clearance,
Registration with PHCN in category D (or FMPS) and Works programme
(Gnatt Chart) shall lead to loss of marks
254
255
SECTION X
FINANCIAL PROPOSAL
(IN VIEW OF THE LARGE NO. OF PROJECTS INVOLVED, THE
PRICE SCHEDULES AND LINE SURVEY DRAWINGS SHALL BE
ISSUED ON LOT BY LOT BASIS. THE BIDDER SHOULD
THEREFORE ENSURE THAT THE PRICE SCHEDULE AND SET OF
SURVEY DRAWINGS RELEVANT TO THE LOT PAID FOR IS
COLLECTED FROM THE TECHNICAL COMMITTEE)
256
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
GENERAL
The bidder is totally and without exception responsible for determining the quantities of
materials he can deliver and for pricing his bid in conformity with the specifications.
The unit prices quoted by the bidder in the bills of quantities will be used solely for the
determination of costs and changes in the works.
The totals of prices given in the Price Schedules including the preliminaries, should be
equal to the bid amount.
Each unit cost for any single item must be firm and will not be adjusted during the
contract.
In case of discrepancy between unit price and total, unit price shall prevail.
The exchange rate used to calculate the Naira equivalent shall be stated.
Prices are firm.
The prices entered in Schedule of Prices shall be the full inclusive value of the
Goods specified including all costs and expenses which may be required in
and for the Supply and Fabrication of the Goods specified together with all
general risks,, liabilities and obligations set forth or implied in the Contract.
CUSTOM AND IMPORT DUTIES

All prices in the Price Schedules on manufactured equipment imported into Nigeria
shall be deemed to exclude Custom/Import Duties.
The Employer shall provide the Custom & Import Duty Exemption Certificate to
enable the EPC contractor clear all equipment/materials imported to Nigeria Port.
257

2006 RFP For Epc (Final) 17-03-2006

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 RFP For Epc (Final) 17-03-2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NIGER DELTA POWER HOLDING COMPANY OF

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

Engineering, Procurement and Construction

DISTRIBUTION LINES AND SUBSTATIONS

ISSUED ------ March, 2006

SECTION I STANDARD LETTER OF INVITATION (LOI)

SECTION II GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

SECTION III SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

SECTION IV LETTER OF INVITATION (LOI)

SECTION V TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR)

SECTION VI STANDARD FORM OF CONTRACT

SECTION VII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

SECTION VIII BID SUBMITTALS

SECTION IX TECHNICAL PROPOSAL(SCHEDULES)

SECTION X FINANCIAL PROPOSAL(SCHEDULE OF PRICES)

SECTION I STANDARD LETTER OF INVITATION (LOI)

Abuja, 17th March 2006

Dear [Name of EPC Contractors]

1.3. PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL

1.3.2 Bid Documentation

ii) Subcontracting part of the Work to domestic sub contractor(s) is considered

i) A brief description of the Bidder/ consortium and sub-contractors’ organisations,

1.4. SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL

“DO NOT OPEN, EXCEPT IN PRESENCE OF THE EVALUATION COMMITTEE.”

1.4.3 The proposal shall contain no inter-lineation or overwriting except as necessary to

1.5. WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL

1.6 MODIFICATION OF BID

Except as otherwise decided by the Employer, modifications to bids must be received

1.7 BID EVALUATION

1.9 AWARD OF CONTRACT

1.10 CONFIRMATION OF RECEIPT

Please inform the Employer by e-mail/facsimile:

i) that you received the letter of invitation,

1.11 CORRUPT OR FRAUDULENT PRACTICES

The Employer requires that the Bidders/Suppliers/Contractors observe the highest

ii) "fraudulent practice" means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a

SECTION II GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

2.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

f) “GC” means these General Conditions of Contract;

g) “Government” means the Government of the Client’s country;

h) “local currency” means the currency of the Government

2.1.2 Law Governing the Contract

2.1.7 Taxes and Duties

2.2 COMMENCEMENT, COMPLETION, MODIFICATION,

2.2.1 Effectiveness of Contract

2.2.2 Commencement of Services

2.2.3 Expiration of Contract

2.2.5 Force Majeure

2.2.5.2 No Breach of Contract

2.2.5.3 Extension of Time

2.2.6.1 By the Client

(b) if the Contractor / Consortium become insolvent or bankrupt;

2.2.6.2 By the Contractor

2.2.6.3 Payment upon Termination

2.3. OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR

2.3.2 Conflict of Interests

2.3.2.1 Contractor Not to Benefit from Commissions Discounts, etc.

2.3.2.2 Contractor and Affiliates Not to Be Otherwise Interested in Employer’s

2.3.2.3 Prohibition of Conflicting Activities

a) during the term of this contract, any business or professional activities

2.3.4 Insurance to Be Taken Out by the Contractor

2.3.5 Contractor Actions Requiring Employer’s Prior Approval

b) appointing such sub-contractors/ sub suppliers not listed by name in Appendix C